Amphion Operators Guide OMM

Keppel Fels – Seadrill B311

User Manual

FINAL DOCUMENTATION

Amphion Operator’s Guide

Customer

Keppel Fels Rig/Hull

Seadrill B311

National Oilwell Varco 10000 Richmond Ave.

Project Manager

Mark West Sales Order Number

JS8063001

Houston, Texas 77042 USA Phone: (713) 346-7500

Serial Number

N/A Project Number

FAX: (713) 435-2195

TX6087 Document Number

Rev

D811001248-MAN-001

www.nov.com

01

™

Amphion Operator’s Guide Standard

Reference

Reference Description

Standard

Amphion Operator’s Guide

This document contains proprietary and confidential information which is the property of National Oilwell Varco, L.P., its affiliates or subsidiaries (all collectively referred to hereinafter as "NOV"). It is loaned for limited purposes only and remains the property of NOV. Reproduction, in whole or in part, or use of this design or distribution of this information to others is not permitted without the express written consent of NOV. This document is to be returned to NOV upon request or upon completion of the use for which it was loaned. This document and the information contained and represented herein is the copyrighted property of NOV. © National Oilwell Varco

www.nov.com

National Oilwell Varco RIG SOLUTIONS 11000 Corporate Centre Drive Houston, TX 77041

Document Number

Rev.

D811001248-MAN-001

01

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01

Revision History

01

08.07.2010

First issue

Anthony Archilla

Paul Williams

Jeff Faga

Rev

Date (dd.mm.yyyy)

Reason for issue

Prepared

Checked

Approved

Change Description Revision 01

Change Description First Issue

Amphion™ GPL Statement This program contains proprietary as well as free software; you can redistribute and/or modify the free portion of the software under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. To viewand/or obtain a copy of the free software used in this product,please visit ftp://ftp.amphion.nov.com/gpl/. Notwithstanding the foregoing, nothing herein shall convey to you the right to utilize National Oilwell Varco trademarks, trade names, services marks or other National Oilwell Varco proprietary materials. In addition, you shall not have the right to publish the name of National Oilwell Varco without the prior permission of National Oilwell Varco in writing. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public Licensealong with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.

www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page i of xii

Table of Contents Chapter 1: General Information Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notes, Cautions, and Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Personnel Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recommended Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General System Safety Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Routine Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Proper Use of Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NOV Service Centers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-1 1-1 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-3 1-3 1-3 1-3 1-3 1-4

Chapter 2: Amphion™ Overview Main Features and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Operator Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Touchscreen Computers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Workstation Control Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Left Control Panel Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Right Control Panel Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Joysticks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Main Menu Navigation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Alarms and Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Operator Tool Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 (This Tool) Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Back or Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Maintenance Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Operator Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Operator Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Keypads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Utility Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Choose Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Choose Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Language Translation Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Clean Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Service Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Common Diagnostics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 I/O Diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Controller-to-Controller (C2C) Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Cyberbase Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Modbus Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Profibus Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24

i www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page ii of xii

Table of Contents Step 7 Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Screen Communication Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HTTP Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Write Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool Ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ownership Controls and Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Granting and Releasing Ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool Controllers and Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optional Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RigSense and WITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Simple Data Acquisition (S-DAQ™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System 5 Data Acquisition (V-DAQ™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic Driller System™ (EDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-25 2-27 2-28 2-30 2-31 2-32 2-32 2-34 2-34 2-35 2-35 2-36 2-36 2-36 2-36 2-36

Chapter 3: Alarms and Events System Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm Message Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm and Event Sort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm Acknowledgement and Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm Sounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-1 3-3 3-4 3-4 3-6 3-7 3-7

Chapter 4: Assignments Drawworks/Top Drive Assignments Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawworks Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top Drive Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-1 4-2 4-2 4-2

Chapter 5: Casing Running Tool (CRT) Operator Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool Ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Readings and Status Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top Drive Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IBOP Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gripper Displays and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CRT Elevator Displays and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Link Tilt Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CRT Rotation Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotate and Lower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Make Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Casing Running Tool Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CRT Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-1 5-1 5-2 5-2 5-3 5-3 5-4 5-4 5-5 5-5 5-6 5-7 5-8

ii www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page iii of xii

Table of Contents Descriptions and Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Pipe Type Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Loading an Existing Setup File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Editing an Existing Setup File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Pipe Type Category Edit Pop-Up Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Calibrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 CRT Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Selecting and Loading a Setup File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Changing Graph Display Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Y or X Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Mark Shoulder Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Highlight Minimum and Maximum Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Zoom (Y or X) In or Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 Display Data Points (Dots) or Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 Fill Graph Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 Turn and Torque Readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Chapter 6: Cathead Operator Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool Ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cathead Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stream Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Slow Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Tong Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Torque Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pull Force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cathead Tool Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-1 6-1 6-1 6-2 6-2 6-3 6-3 6-4 6-4 6-5

Chapter 7: Chairs (Workstations) Workstation Status Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Tool Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Joystick Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Chair Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Deadman Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Chair Tool Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 Multi-Tool Controller (MTC) Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 Emergency Stop (E-Stop) Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Joystick Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Hook Load Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

iii www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page iv of xii

Table of Contents Chapter 8: Crown-Mounted Compensator (CMC) Operator Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool Ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP (Hydraulic Pump) Oil System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Instrument Air Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Position Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Valve Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hydraulic Valve Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Air Valve Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CMC Pressure Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Position Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compensator Tool Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-1 8-1 8-1 8-2 8-2 8-2 8-2 8-2 8-3 8-3 8-4 8-4 8-5

Chapter 9: Conveyor Operator Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Tool Ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Status Displays and Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Tool Mode Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Auto Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Slow Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Warm Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Idle Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Belt Controls and Pipe Length Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 Pipe Positioner Controls and Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 Pipe Lifter Controls and Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 Conveyor Tool Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Chapter 10: Drawworks Tripping and Drilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Tool Ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Hook Load Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Fault and Status Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Parking Brake Status Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 Parking Brake Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 Derrick Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 Block and Elevator Height Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 Defining Block Travel Limits and Stop Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 High Travel Limit and Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 Low Travel Limit and Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 Defining the Drill Stop Point Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Defining CMC Position Setpoint Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 Defining Maximum Block Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 Lowering and Hoisting Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 Defining a Maximum Pull Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12

iv www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page v of xii

Table of Contents Defining the Drawworks Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Slip & Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lowering and Hoisting Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Autodrill Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activating the Electronic Driller System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activating or Deactivating Autodrill Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Parameter Setpoint Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drilling Trends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto Reaming Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawworks Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Controls Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auxiliary Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool Diagnostics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drum Encoders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enable or Disable an Encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hook Load Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enable or Disable a Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compensator Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enable or Disable a Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawworks Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm and Fault Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarms Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking Brake Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake Capacity Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake Valve Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake Wear Measurement Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drum and Block Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor/VFD Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibration Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block and Elevator Position Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hook Load Tare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standpipe Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CMC Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abnormal Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10-13 10-13 10-13 10-14 10-17 10-18 10-18 10-19 10-19 10-21 10-22 10-23 10-25 10-26 10-26 10-27 10-28 10-28 10-28 10-28 10-29 10-29 10-29 10-30 10-30 10-30 10-31 10-31 10-31 10-32 10-32 10-32 10-33 10-34 10-35 10-36 10-36 10-38 10-38 10-46 10-47 10-48 10-49 10-49 10-49 10-49 10-49

v www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page vi of xii

Table of Contents Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Soft Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Category 2 Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-Stop (Category 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10-49 10-49 10-50 10-50

Chapter 11: Driller Auxiliaries Operator Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Driller Auxiliaries Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 Mud Treatment Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4

Chapter 12: Fingerboard Operator Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 Fingerboard Tool Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3 Fingerboard Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4

Chapter 13: Foxhole Operator Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool Ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foxhole Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Override Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foxhole Tool Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13-1 13-1 13-2 13-2 13-3 13-4

Chapter 14: Hydraulic Power Unit (HPU) Operator Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HPU Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HPU Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14-1 14-2 14-2 14-2 14-2 14-3 14-4

Chapter 15: Mud Bucket Operator Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool Ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mud Bucket Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arm Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jaw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mud Bucket Tool Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15-5 15-5 15-6 15-6 15-6 15-6 15-7

Chapter 16: Mud Pumps Operator Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1 Tool Ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1

vi www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page vii of xii

Table of Contents Mud Pump Status Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Strokes Per Minute (SPM) Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Maximum SPM Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standpipe Pressure Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining the Pressure Limit Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting and Pausing Mud Pump Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stop All Mud Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operator Messages and Miscellaneous Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mud Pump Tool Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mud Pump Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auxiliary Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status and Fault Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Motor Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16-2 16-2 16-3 16-3 16-4 16-4 16-5 16-5 16-6 16-7 16-8 16-8 16-9

Chapter 17: Ownership Overview Operator Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1 Ownership Overview Tool Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2

Chapter 18: Power Slips Operator Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool Ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Slip Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto Greaser Controls and Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Slips Tool Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18-1 18-1 18-2 18-3 18-4 18-5

Chapter 19: Power System Operator Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2 Screen Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2 Power System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-3 Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-4 Inverters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-4 Choppers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-5 Rectifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-6 Motor Control Centers (MCCs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-8 Trends. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-9 Power Capacity Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-10 AC Bus Generator Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-10 AC Bus Transformer Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-10 System Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-10 Total Online Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-11 DC Rectifier Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-11 DC Bus Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-11 Power Consumed Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-12 DC Bus Consumed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-12 AC Bus Consumed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-12

vii www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page viii of xii

Table of Contents Power Available Calculations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Total Power Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool Power Available (General) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Limiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19-13 19-13 19-13 19-13

Chapter 20: Racker (Bridge Racker) Operator Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1 Tool Ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1 Fingerboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2 Zooming In on a Fingerboard Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2 Selecting a Fingerboard Work Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2 Status Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-3 Jaw and Tool Override Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-5 Backup Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-6 Jaw and Tool Override Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-7 Fingerboard Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-7 Defining the Tool Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-7 Defining the Tool Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-8 Joystick Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-9 Defining the Operation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-10 Axis Override Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-10 Manual Override Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-11 Defining the Fingerboard Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-12 Set Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-12 Set Begin/End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-13 Defining the Pipe Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-14 Defining the Pipe Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-14 Defining the Pipe Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-15 Racker Tool Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-16 Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-17 Maintenance Mode and Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-17 Axis Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-18 Bridge Racker Trolley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-19 Bridge Racker Aft Traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-20 Bridge Racker Fore Traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-21 Bridge Racker Slew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-22 Bridge Racker Hoist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-23 Thread Compensation Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-24 Guide Arm Trolley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-25 Guide Arm Shoulder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-26 Guide Arm Wrist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-27 Guide Arm Slew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-28 Guide Arm Telescope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-29 Bridge Racker Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-30 Trolley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-31 Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-32 Hoist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-33

viii www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page ix of xii

Table of Contents Slew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Guide Arm Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Slew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shoulder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Telescope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wrist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATOS Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bridge Racker Trolley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bridge Racker Aft Traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bridge Racker Hoist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Guide Arm Trolley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Guide Arm Shoulder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Guide Arm Wrist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Guide Arm Slew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Guide Arm Telescope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Thread Comp Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Axis Position Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

20-34 20-35 20-36 20-37 20-38 20-39 20-40 20-41 20-41 20-42 20-43 20-44 20-44 20-45 20-45 20-46 20-47 20-48

Chapter 21: Racker (Pipe Racking System PRS) Operator Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1 Tool Ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1 Status Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-2 Fingerboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-3 Zooming In on a Fingerboard Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-3 Selecting a Fingerboard Work Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-5 Fingerboard Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-5 Fingerboard Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-5 Racker Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-6 Racker Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-6 Foxhole Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-6 Well/Foxhole Teach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-7 Jaw Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-7 Tubular Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-8 Pipe Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-8 Pipe Size Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-8 Handling Tool Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-8 Tubular Length Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-8 Joystick Controls and Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-9 Racker Tool Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-10 Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-11 Workstation Override Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-12 Racker X/Y Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-12 Racker Travel Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-13

Chapter 22: Rotary Table

ix www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page x of xii

Table of Contents Operator Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool Ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direction Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lock Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speed and Torque Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining the Speed Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zero Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining the Torque Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotary Table Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22-1 22-1 22-2 22-3 22-3 22-4 22-4 22-4 22-4 22-5 22-6

Chapter 23: Roughneck Operator Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1 Tool Ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1 Status Displays and Readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-2 Joystick Touchscreen Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-3 Travel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-4 Trip Mode Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-4 Auto Sequence Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-5 Override Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-6 Spin Wrench Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-7 Spin Mode Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-8 Torque Wrench Tong Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-9 Torque Wrench Carriage Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-10 Torque Mode Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-11 Configuring the Roughneck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-12 Defining a Torque Setpoint Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-12 Defining the Tool Joint Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-13 Slow Mode Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-13 Power Slip Mode Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-14 Roughneck Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-14 Well/Foxhole Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-15 Roughneck Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-16 Roughneck Tool Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-17 Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-18 Positions Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-19 Travel Minimum and Maximum Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-20 Well Center and Foxhole Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-20 Well Center Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-21 Foxhole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-21 Well Center and Foxhole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-22 Well Center and Two Foxholes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-22 Well Center and Foxhole With Turn Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-23 Well Center and Two Foxholes With Turn Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-23 Travel Home Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-24 Travel Duck Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-24

x www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page xi of xii

Table of Contents Duck Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mud Bucket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating Tong Open Throat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Travel Well/Foxhole Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

23-25 23-25 23-26 23-26 23-27

Chapter 24: S-DAQ™ Operator Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hook Load and Weight On Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standpipe Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RPM, Torque, and Tong Line Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mud Pump Displays and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-DAQ Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mud Pits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shaker Tanks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status Displays and Tank Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suction Tanks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status Displays and Tank Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24-1 24-1 24-2 24-2 24-2 24-3 24-3 24-3 24-5 24-6 24-6 24-6 24-7 24-7 24-7 24-8

Chapter 25: Top Drive System (TDS) Operator Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1 Tool Ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1 Status Readings and Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-2 Speed and Torque Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-2 Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-3 Speed and Torque Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-4 Defining a Throttle Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-4 Zero Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-5 Defining a Drill Torque Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-5 Defining a Makeup Torque Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-5 Defining a Spin Speed Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-6 Defining a Spin Torque Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-7 Direction and Mode Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-7 Make Up Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-8 Break Out Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-8 Elevator, Torque Wrench, and IBOP Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-9 Elevator and Elevator Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-9 Torque Wrench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-9 IBOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-10 Brake Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-11 Dolly Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-12

xi www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page xii of xii

Table of Contents Link Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCW and CW Link Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Link Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mousehole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top Drive Tool Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor/VFD Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chopper/DBR Status Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TDS Motor/Assigned VFD Status Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Winding and Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Winding Temp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Temp Abort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auxiliary Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Trends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25-13 25-13 25-13 25-13 25-14 25-15 25-16 25-16 25-16 25-17 25-17 25-17 25-17 25-18 25-18 25-18 25-19

Chapter 26: V-DAQ™ Operator Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-1 Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-2

Chapter 27: Zone Management System (ZMS) Equipment Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Releasing Tool Ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ZMS Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27-1 27-2 27-3 27-4 27-6 27-8

Chapter A: Appendix Network Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 Opening a Command Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 Command Descriptions and Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 Ping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 Ping Command Switch Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3 IP Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3 Tracert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3 Nslookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4 Network Address Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5

xii www.nov.com

FINAL DOCUMENTATION Amphion Operator’s Guide

Chapter 1.0 Amphion Operator’s Guide

www.nov.com

FINAL DOCUMENTATION Amphion Operator’s Guide

Section 1.1 General Information

www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 1-1 of 4

General Information

This manual contains examples of Amphion equipment, features, and operator interface screens, and may or may not represent your particular rig configuration.

Conventions This manual is intended for use by field engineering, installation, operation, and repair personnel. Every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of the information contained herein. National Oilwell Varco® (NOV) will not be held liable for errors in this material, or for consequences arising from misuse of this material.

Notes, Cautions, and Warnings Notes, cautions, and warnings provide readers with additional information, and to advise the reader to take specific action to protect personnel from potential injury or lethal conditions. They may also inform the reader of actions necessary to prevent equipment damage. Please pay close attention to these advisories.

The note symbol indicates that additional information is provided about the current topics.

! The caution symbol indicates that potential damage to equipment or injury to personnel exists. Follow instructions explicitly. Extreme care should be taken when performing operations or procedures preceded by this caution symbol.

1-1 www.nov.com

1

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 1-2 of 4

General Information

The warning symbol indicates a definite risk of equipment damage or danger to personnel. Failure to follow safe work procedures could result in serious or fatal injury to personnel, significant equipment damage, or extended rig down time.

Illustrations Illustrations (figures) provide a graphical representation of equipment components or screen snapshots for use in identifying parts or establishing nomenclature, and may or may not be drawn to scale. For component information specific to your rig configuration, see the technical drawings included with your NOV documentation.

Safety Requirements NOV equipment is installed and operated in a controlled drilling rig environment involving hazardous situations. Proper maintenance is important for safe and reliable operation. Procedures outlined in NOV manuals are the recommended methods of performing operations and maintenance.

! To avoid injury to personnel or equipment damage, carefully observe requirements outlined in this section.

Personnel Training All personnel performing installation, operations, repair, or maintenance procedures on the equipment, or those in the vicinity of the equipment, should be trained on rig safety, tool operation, and maintenance to ensure their safety.

! Personnel should wear protective gear during installation, maintenance, and certain operations.

Contact the NOV Drilling Equipment training department for more information about equipment operation and maintenance training.

1-2 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 1-3 of 4

General Information

1

Recommended Tools Service operations may require the use of tools designed specifically for the purpose described. NOV recommends that only those tools specified be used when stated. Ensure that personnel and equipment safety are not jeopardized when following service procedures or using tools not specifically recommended by NOV.

General System Safety Practices The equipment discussed in this manual may require or contain one or more utilities, such as electrical, hydraulic, pneumatic, or cooling water.

! Read and follow the guidelines below before installing equipment or performing maintenance to avoid endangering exposed persons or damaging equipment.

R

Isolate energy sources before beginning work.

R

Avoid performing maintenance or repairs while the equipment is in operation.

R

Wear proper protective equipment during equipment installation, maintenance, or repair.

Replacing Components R

Verify that all components (such as cables, hoses, etc.) are tagged and labeled during assembly and disassembly of equipment to ensure correct installment.

R

Replace failed or damaged components with NOV certified parts. Failure to do so could result in equipment damage or injury to personnel.

Routine Maintenance Equipment must be maintained on a routine basis. See the service manual for maintenance recommendations.

! Failure to conduct routine maintenance could result in equipment damage or injury to personnel.

Proper Use of Equipment NOV equipment is designed for specific functions and applications, and should be used only for its intended purpose.

1-3 www.nov.com

1

General Information

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 1-4 of 4

NOV Service Centers The link below provides after-hours contact information for emergencies or other equipment issues requiring an immediate response by NOV service personnel. http://www.nov.com/contact_us/24hr_EmergencyList.asp Also see NOV document number D811001337-DAS-001, titled “Service Center Directory.”

1-4 www.nov.com

FINAL DOCUMENTATION Amphion Operator’s Guide

Section 1.2 Amphion™ Overview

www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 2-1 of 38

Amphion™ Overview

This manual contains examples of Amphion equipment, features, and operator interface screens, and may or may not represent your particular rig configuration.

Main Features and Equipment The Amphion system provides operators with control of drilling tools and processes from an ergonomically-correct workstation. Usually located inside the driller’s cabin, the workstations offer tool control and status information applicable to the operations being performed. The LER and multi-tool controller (MTC) cabinets are considered safe areas for installing Amphion components that carry no hazardous area classifications. Depending on your particular rig’s configuration, it may contain variations of the following features and equipment: R

One or more operator workstations, equipped with touchscreens

R

One or more multi-tool controller (MTC) cabinets

R

Integrated operator interface application for National Oilwell Varco (NOV) and thirdparty tools, systems, or processes, such as: Alarm and Event System Automated Drawworks System Automated Roughneck Bridge Racker and Tailing Arm Casing Running Tool Chair (Workstation) Diagnostics Drawworks VFD Assignment Controls Driller Auxiliaries Fingerboard Foxhole Hydraulic BX Elevators Hydraulic Cathead Hydraulic Power Unit Mud Pump Motor Assignment Controls Motor Control Center (MCC) Mud Pumps

2-1 www.nov.com

2

Amphion™ Overview

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 2-2 of 38

Ownership Overview Pipe Racking System Power Management System Power Slips Rotary Support Table Silicon-Controlled Rectifiers (SCR) Simple Data Acquisition (S-DAQ™) module System 5 Data Acquisition (V-DAQ™) module Top Drive System Top Drive VFD Assignment Controls Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) System RigSense™ application, RigSense server Zone Management System (ZMS) R

Engineering drawings

R

Equipment service manuals

R

Amphion tool controller service manual

R

Amphion operator’s guide

R

Amphion technical reference manual

2-2 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 2-3 of 38

Amphion™ Overview

2

Operator Workstation The workstations are the user's interface to the control network and tools. A Wrap-Around™ workstation is shown here. Located in the driller’s cabin, each workstation may contain: R

Amphion touchscreens (four shown here)

R

Joysticks (one shown here)

R

Two discrete switch control panels

R

One chair

300 250

350

500 550 400 450 600

650

700 750

200

800

150

850

100

900

TONG SCALE HOOK LOAD

50

X 1000 LB

O

LCD WEIGHT ON BIT

X 1000 LB

1000

Touchscreen Computers Workstations include self-contained touchscreens that display tool control, drilling operation, alarm, and status information. The Wrap-Around workstation can accommodate up to four touchscreens, all with access to tools connected to the network.

2-3 www.nov.com

2

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 2-4 of 38

Amphion™ Overview

Workstation Control Panels Joysticks are used for tools that require controlled movement, such as the drawworks or the racker. See section titled "Joysticks" on page 2-6. Discrete switch controls are normally dedicated to frequently-used operations (such as opening and closing the power slips or racker jaws). While there are many possible combinations of controls and placement of the buttons and discrete switches, two examples of workstation control panels are presented here. Specific controls and their placement can vary widely from one rig to the next, depending on the customer’s needs.

Left Control Panel Examples

MUD PU THRO MP #1 TTLE

MUD PU THRO MP #1 TTLE

MUD PU THRO MP #2 TTLE

MUD PU THRO MP #2 TTLE

M U D P U M P S

MUD PU THRO MP #3 TTLE

OFF /AUT O

N

TDS

KE

CLO

SE

TDS

DRIL L

CLO SE

BRA

TDS

OPE

MUD PU THRO MP #3 TTLE

FLO

AT

LINK

OPE N

POW

ER S

TILT

OPE N

CLO SE

ELE

VAT OR R AC

ELE

VAT OR

N

KER

OFF /AUT O

OPE

CLO

SE

RAC KER X OVE /Y RRID E

OFF /AUT O

DRA

ING

JAW

ON

W

OVE WORKS RRID E

RAC K TRA ER OVE VEL RRID E

PAR K

RAC KE JAW R S

ON

DOL

PAR K

LINK CLO SE

TDS

TDS

TDS OPE N

IBOP LINK

TILT

FLO AT

CLO SE

LIPS

DRIL L

TDS

P U M P S

ON OPE N

TDS

M U D

BRA

LY E

NAB

ING

BRA

KE

LE

KE

SLIP

S EN

OVE

ADS

RRID

E

OPE N

ABL E

CLO

SE

IBOP

2-4 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 2-5 of 38

2

Amphion™ Overview

Right Control Panel Examples

OOR L FL DRIL IPMENT EQU TOP E-S

H TO

PUS

OOR L FL DRIL IPMENT EQU TOP E-S

P

STO

H TO

PUS

P

STO

M

TDS

P RT R

O AUT AR - ENCE U SEQ

RPM

TDS

E

AK

MAK

BRE

OUT IN

N

DOW UP

E

U ORQ AR T PIN AR S E

CLO

G RRIA W CA

T

CLO

L WEL

BAC

K

SE

SE

N OPE

E

EAS

SE

INCR

L TOO IP H ERS OWN SE ALL A RELE SE/ CLO K LOC N/ E P O AUTO

REA

N OPE

DEC

LOW LIC F RAU ALVE HYD V CMC UT OFF SH

W AR T

AIR KING E WOR R CMC PRESSU APV

W

AR S AR

EL TRAV

SE C LO N OPE

MAIN CMC VE VAL

L TOO IP H ERS OWN SE ALL A E REL IPS P/SL R BLE ENA LEVATO E BX

PULL PAY

EAD

CATH

2-5 www.nov.com

2

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 2-6 of 38

Amphion™ Overview

Joysticks

Unless the override is engaged, the trigger (also referred to as a “dead man switch”) mounted on the front of the joystick must be depressed in order to operate the equipment.

Open Slips Close Slips Upper

Lower

Lower Hoist

Dead man switch

Dead man switch

Lower

+Y +X

-X

-Y

Hoist

Drawworks and Power Slips

Bridge Racker or PRS

The joystick mounted on the operator workstation’s right control panel can control: R

The drawworks

R

The drawworks and the power slips

R

The racker

The tool or tools that a joystick controls depends upon your particular rig configuration and tool ownership. Tool ownership logic prevents the operator from taking ownership of both the drawworks and the racker simultaneously. See section titled "Tool Ownership" on page 2-34. Using the joystick to move the racker affects its destination, which varies depending on its current mode (selected via the user interface). If the joystick does not offer power slip controls, then the workstation’s control panel normally contains a discrete switch for opening and closing the slips. This is in addition to touchscreen controls. If the joystick has the ability to control both the power slips and the drawworks, the workstation’s control panel will not contain controls for opening and closing the power slips. However, the control

2-6 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 2-7 of 38

Amphion™ Overview

2

panel will contain a button that must be pressed in order to enable the power slips and allow the operator to control the slips by using either the joystick or touchscreen controls.

See Chapter 10, titled "Drawworks,” Chapter 18, titled "Power Slips,” Chapter 20, titled "Racker (Bridge Racker),” and Chapter 21, titled "Racker (Pipe Racking System PRS).”

See section titled "Workstation Control Panels" on page 2-4.

2-7 www.nov.com

2

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 2-8 of 38

Amphion™ Overview

Main Menu Navigation This section of the operator’s guide provides a brief overview of the main components normally included on the main menu navigation bar. See appropriately-titled sections below, and toolspecific chapters for more detailed information about each tool’s menu and operator screens. The navigation menu shown below displays along the bottom of most screens.

Active tool

Navigation menu buttons

Alarms and Events The main menu’s Alarms button blinks red when there is at least one active and unacknowledged alarm. The button displays solid red when there is at least one active but already acknowledged alarm. Otherwise, the button displays solid blue. Press Alarms to display the tool alarm menu.

2-8 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 2-9 of 38

Amphion™ Overview

2

The tool buttons blink red when there is at least one active and unacknowledged alarm for that particular tool. The button displays solid red when there is at least one active but already acknowledged alarm. Otherwise, the button displays solid blue. Press the red tool button to display alarms associated with that tool. See Chapter 3, titled "Alarms and Events” for more information.

Operator Tool Menus Press Tools to display the appropriate operator’s tool menu.

Driller Tools

Assistant Driller Tools

Current tool ownership status indicators display in the bottom left corner of each tool button (where applicable). See section titled "Tool Ownership" on page 2-34 for more information. Press to select a tool and display its default operator screen. See tool-specific chapters in this manual for more detail.

2-9 www.nov.com

2

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 2-10 of 38

Amphion™ Overview

(This Tool) Menu The label on the tool menu button changes, depending upon the currently-selected tool. For example, the top drive’s tool menu is labeled Top Drive. Press the tool menu button to display its menu. Most tools listed in the operator’s tool menu have tool-specific menus that normally include the basic options shown here.

See section titled "Utility Menu" on page 2-13.

See section titled "Common Diagnostics Menu" on page 2-19.

See Chapter 3, titled "Alarms and Events.”

See section titled "Maintenance Mode" on page 2-11.”

See tool-specific chapter.

Press the Operator button to display the current tool’s operator screen.

See tool-specific chapters for more information about each tool’s menu. See sections below for information about each of the above menu items.

Back or Forward Press Back or Forward to toggle between the current screen and the previous screen.

2-10 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 2-11 of 38

Amphion™ Overview

2

Maintenance Mode Enable maintenance mode to engage tool override for maintenance purposes only.

Use with caution. Significant risk of equipment damage and danger to personnel exists in maintenance mode. Failure to observe and follow proper safe working procedures could result in serious or fatal injury to personnel, significant equipment damage, and extended rig down time.

Controls are disabled at the operator workstation touchscreens when maintenance mode is enabled. From the diagnostic workstation (DWS) computer, select one of the following tools: R

Auxiliary (normally includes the cathead, HPU, power slips, and rotary table)

R

Conveyor

R

Racker

R

Roughneck

R

Top Drive

Press --> Maintenance Mode to display the Maintenance Mode screen.

Press Active to engage maintenance mode for the appropriate tool controller (also referred to as an “SBC”). Press Inactive to disengage maintenance mode.

2-11 www.nov.com

2

Amphion™ Overview

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 2-12 of 38

A green backlight marks the current selection.

Enabling Auxiliary maintenance mode places all auxiliary tools into maintenance mode.

Operator Screens Many tool screens contain common features shown in this section.

Operator Messages Most tool screens contain messages for the operator that display along the bottom of the screen.

Keypads Numeric keypads and alpha-numeric keyboards are pop-up windows that appear when the operator presses a tool’s on-screen button, and is normally used to define a specific parameter for a tool.

2-12 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 2-13 of 38

Amphion™ Overview

2

Utility Menu Press --> Utility to display the Utility menu:

Choose Units Press --> Utility --> Choose Units to display the Choose Units pop-up window.

Press the arrow up or down buttons to highlight and select a unit of measure.

Measurement units selected on this screen affect all screens displayed on that particular touchscreen. Different units of measure can be assigned to other touchscreens. For example, one touchscreen can display metric, while another displays U.S. measurements.

Press Close to return to the previous screen.

2-13 www.nov.com

2

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 2-14 of 38

Amphion™ Overview

Choose Language Press --> Utility --> Choose Language to display the Choose Language pop-up window.

Pig Latin and English

Russian and English

This screen provides a way for the operator to select English (default), or any other language (or languages) that the operator screens are configured to support. Press the arrow up or down buttons to highlight and select a language.

Languages selected here affect all screens displayed on that particular touchscreen. Different languages can be assigned to other touchscreens. For example, one touchscreen can display Russian, while another displays English.

Press Close to return to the previous screen.

2-14 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 2-15 of 38

Amphion™ Overview

2

Language Translation Editor At the Choose Language pop-up window (see section titled "Choose Language" on page 2-14), press Edit Translations to display the Language Translation Editor window.

Document

General

Add

Delete

Close

This window provides a way for the operator to edit the translations for languages other than English, or add translations that are missing. Translations are stored in the operator screens one phrase at a time. Any single-line string on a screen has its own translation. (For example, the phrase “Drill Torque” is translated as a whole, as opposed to word-by-word.) Each screen document has its own set of translations.

Document Press Document to display available translations for the last screen selected. (There may be no translations if that particular screen has not been configured to include them.)

General Press General to display general translations that apply to the navigation bar and other common screens (for example, the diagnostic or alarm screens).

2-15 www.nov.com

2

Amphion™ Overview

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 2-16 of 38

Add Use this button to add a new translation: 1. Press Add to display the Add New Translation Key pop-up window.

2. Type the new translation into the space provided, then press Enter (or Enteray as shown on the keyboard above).

The translation (“Home” in this example) appears in both the left and the right panes of the Language Translation Editor window. 3. Press to select the new translation (in the bottom right pane) to display the keyboard pop-up window again. 4. Type its translation as you want it to appear in that pane (see example shown below).

2-16 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 2-17 of 38

Amphion™ Overview

2

5. Type the translation into the space provided, then press Enter to return to the Language Translation Editor window.

Delete Press Delete to delete an existing translation.

Close Press Close to close the window.

2-17 www.nov.com

2

Amphion™ Overview

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 2-18 of 38

Clean Screen Press --> Utility --> Clean Screen to temporarily disable tool screens to allow time for cleaning the touchscreen without accidentally pressing tool controls. Press Start to begin the onscreen timer, which counts slowly backward from ten.

Press Start as many times as necessary, then press Return.

Service Pages Service pages are not normally available from the operator workstation touchscreens, and therefore are not addressed in detail in this manual. Access the service pages from the touchscreen mounted in the multi-tool controller (MTC) cabinet.

The MTC touchscreen does not allow tool operation.

See the NOV document titled “Amphion Tool Controller Service Manual” for more information about the service pages.

2-18 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 2-19 of 38

Amphion™ Overview

2

Common Diagnostics Menu

This section provides a general overview of the diagnostic screens available through the operator interface. For more detailed information about the tool controller service pages interface, including advanced troubleshooting procedures, see the NOV document titled “Amphion Tool Controller Service Manual.”

Press --> Common Diagnostics to display the Common Diagnostics menu.

See general descriptions for each diagnostic screen in the sections below. Press Close to return to the main menu.

2-19 www.nov.com

2

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 2-20 of 38

Amphion™ Overview

I/O Diagnostic Press --> Common Diagnostics --> I/O Diagnostic to display the I/O Diagnostic screen. The left side of the sample screen below contains buttons for selecting an I/O type (depending on the currently-selected tool). Press to select and display information. Item Name

I/O Types

Information Sort buttons

Current Value

R

MOD: Modbus address. Information regarding commands originating from tools and other Ethernet devices connected to the network.

R

DP1: Information from the first Applicom card on the first PROFIBUS DP network (typically used for tools).

R

NET: Information regarding commands originating from a touchscreen or control panel.

R

C2C: Controller-to-controller communication input devices only. The purpose of this type is to receive input from the other controllers, not to send commands to them. Therefore, only input classes are assigned to this I/O type.

R

DP2 (optional): Information from the optional second Applicom card on the second PROFIBUS DP network, if applicable (typically used to interface with the other tool controllers or third-party systems).

Press any of the sort buttons located along the bottom of the screen to sort information By Name, Node, or Class. Press the blue arrow up or down buttons to navigate through the diagnostic pages. Press Back to return to the Common Diagnostics menu.

2-20 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 2-21 of 38

Amphion™ Overview

2

Controller-to-Controller (C2C) Status Press --> Common Diagnostics --> Controller-to-Controller Status to display the Controller-to-Controller Status screen.

The controller graphic boxes display green to indicate normal communication, or red to indicate a communication error. The controller name and current status display in the top left corner of the controller graphic. Press a controller box to display additional detail.

Code 0

5632

Message

Comment

OK

The other controller is functioning normally.

Client has not begun receiving data from the server.

The client was able to connect to the server, but has not begun sending data.

2-21 www.nov.com

2

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 2-22 of 38

Amphion™ Overview

Code

Message

Comment

5648

Client could not connect to its server.

The other controller may not be running.

5664

Client believes that its server has stopped working.

The other controller was connected and running normally, but has stopped running.

Cyberbase Status Press --> Common Diagnostics --> Cyberbase Status to display the Cyberbase Status screen (not shown here). This screen displays communication information between various NOV products using Ethernet protocol, and is not available for all tools.

Modbus Status Press --> Common Diagnostics --> Modbus Status to display the Modbus Status screen.

The illustration shown here relates to the top drive. Green node graphics indicate that it is operating and communicating properly; red indicates an alarm or communication error. Press a node to display detailed information related to its status (shown below).

2-22 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 2-23 of 38

Amphion™ Overview

2

The Node Status pop-up window lists all WebObjects on the controller with which the communications node is associated. It also displays the value of each WebObject. The values are live, and change as the values from the remote controller change. Press the Node Status window to display the node’s Process Input image.

A process image is essentially a group of bits that the controller holds in its memory to maintain a complete map of the current state of the inputs or outputs from a given communications node. The Process Image pop-up window displays either all of the output or all of the input process image for that communications subsystem mode. Press Switch to Output Image to display the same information regarding the node’s output image. Press anywhere outside of the output image display to return to the Modbus screen.

2-23 www.nov.com

2

Amphion™ Overview

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 2-24 of 38

Profibus Status Press --> Common Diagnostics --> Profibus Status to display the Profibus Network Status screen.

Green indicates the node is communicating through the Profibus network; red indicates the node is not communicating through the network; yellow indicates the node is reporting diagnostic information. The controller has not lost communication with the node, but the node may have a problem (see note below).

The absolute encoder buttons normally display yellow at startup, then turn green after approximately one minute. Yellow is normal for emergency-stop (e-stop) conditions.

Press any node button to display a detailed node status pop-up window. Node number Status code

2-24 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 2-25 of 38

Amphion™ Overview

2

Profibus Status Codes Code

Message

0

Node is functioning normally

33

Node is not communicating with the network

36

Node is not configured

45

Dialog software is not memory-resident

47

Invalid board number

93

Driver is not accessible

255

IO_RefreshInput was not executed beforehand

Step 7 Status Press --> Common Diagnostics --> Step 7 Status to display the Step 7 Status screen.

This screen displays information from programmable logic controllers (PLCs). This Ethernet communication protocol not used on all communications systems. Press any node to display additional information.

2-25 www.nov.com

2

Amphion™ Overview

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 2-26 of 38

Press the status detail box to display the node’s input image.

Press the right arrow to display additional input image information, or press Switch to Output Image to display the same information regarding the node’s output image. Press anywhere outside of the output image display to return to the Step 7 Status screen.

2-26 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 2-27 of 38

Amphion™ Overview

2

Screen Communication Logs

Screen Communication Log troubleshooting screens in this section are intended for use by trained NOV technicians.

Press --> Common Diagnostics --> Screen Communication Logs to display the main Screen Communication Logs main screen.

Press the buttons along the top of the window to display different communication information (see general descriptions in sections below). Press Close to return to the previous screen.

2-27 www.nov.com

2

Amphion™ Overview

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 2-28 of 38

Tool Controllers Press Tool Controllers to display the Tool Controllers Communication Log screen.

Press anywhere inside the Controller box to display additional information.

Amphion software communicates simultaneously with all the tool controllers connected to the network. The Tool Controller Communication Log screen displays basic information about each tool controller, such as the method of communication being used between the controller and the software, and the amount of time the software has been communicating with the tool. Press any communication box to display message information.

2-28 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 2-29 of 38

Amphion™ Overview

2

Press any message to display more detail.

Press Close to close the window.

2-29 www.nov.com

2

Amphion™ Overview

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 2-30 of 38

Ownership Press Ownership to display tool Ownership Communication Log screen.

This window contains information about the tool ownership system, such as a record of the ownership configuration file. Tool ownership is a built-in safety feature, designed to prevent more than one operator from simultaneously controlling a tool. (See section titled "Tool Ownership" on page 2-34.) Press any of the Ownership States boxes to display more detail.

Press Close to close the window.

2-30 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 2-31 of 38

Amphion™ Overview

2

HTTP Requests Press HTTP Requests to display the HTTP Request Communication Log window.

This window contains the last several messages passed between the touchscreen software and the tool controllers. Press any message to display more detail.

Press Close to close the window.

2-31 www.nov.com

2

Amphion™ Overview

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 2-32 of 38

Write Monitor Press Write Monitor to display the Write Monitor Communication Log screen.

This window contains only requests that were used to write commands or data to the tool controllers. Press Close to close the window.

Exceptions Press the Exceptions tab to display the Exceptions Communication Log screen.

This screen contains a list of errors that occurred during applet communications. Press any message to display more detail.

2-32 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 2-33 of 38

Amphion™ Overview

2

Press Close to close the window.

2-33 www.nov.com

2

Amphion™ Overview

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 2-34 of 38

Tool Ownership This section contains information about Amphion tool ownership, and is intended to provide rig personnel with a basic understanding of the concept of tool ownership and how it affects rig operations. Amphion tools can be controlled from operator workstations using joysticks, discrete switches, and touchscreen controls. For safety reasons, control of most tools is limited to one operator (workstation) at a time. All tools affected by Amphion tool ownership are “owned” by the system at startup. Consequently, before a tool can be controlled from any workstation, the operator must submit an ownership request by pressing the Ownership button located on the tool screen. Once a workstation assumes ownership of a tool, that workstation retains ownership; subsequent ownership requests from other workstations are invalid until ownership is released.

To prevent untimely operation shutdowns due to hardware or power failures that affect workstation controls, the controller releases tool ownership only from those workstations affected by the failure. Hardware or power failures that do not affect tool operation will not cause tool ownership release.

Ownership Controls and Status Where applicable, tool screens contain an Ownership button. The button’s color and text indicates its ownership status.

R

A green ownership button, displaying the word “Available,” indicates the tool is available for ownership. Your station can assume ownership only if the button is enabled, and the word “Take” appears in black text along the bottom of the button. If the text “Ownership” appears in white, and the button is disabled, your station cannot assume ownership of the tool. If you are unable to take ownership because your station already has ownership of another conflicting tool, the name of that tool appears in white text along the bottom of the button.

R

An orange ownership button indicates that the tool is currently owned by one of the operators. The text display inside of the button indicates the workstation that currently owns the tool.

R

A red ownership button indicates an emergency stop is engaged, and the tool is unavailable.

2-34 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 2-35 of 38

Amphion™ Overview

2

Granting and Releasing Ownership Before granting tool ownership to a workstation, the controller verifies that the following conditions are met: R

The IP address of the workstation requesting ownership has permission to control the tool (see "Tool Controllers and Security” below).

R

The tool is not owned by any other workstation.

Once an operator is finished using a specific tool, he or she should release ownership of that tool by pressing the Ownership button again. Alternatively, use the operator workstation control panel’s Tool Ownership - Release All button.

L TOO IP H ERS OWN SE ALL A RELE

INCR DECR

EASE

L TOO P RSHI OWNE E ALL AS RELE SE/ CLO LOCK N/ OPE AUTO

EASE

AIR ING WORK RE CMC PRESSU APV

OW C FL AULI E HYDR VALV CMC UT OFF SH SE CLO N OPE

MAIN CMC E VALV

PULL PAY

EAD CATH

Tool Controllers and Security An Amphion tool controller (sometimes referred to as an “ATC,” or an “SBC”) is an embedded computer designed to run platform-independent software to control machinery in industrial applications. The Amphion tool controller consists of a high-end processor with Ethernet connectivity as the standard communication protocol, with optional Profibus hardware for tool remote I/O communications where necessary. Amphion controllers are traditionally located in safe area MTC cabinets, however certain situations may require that they be installed in hazardous areas. In such cases, the appropriate certification must be obtained, and they must be installed inside approved enclosures. Administrative access to software stored on the tool controller is password protected to prevent accidental modification to tool parameters or settings.

2-35 www.nov.com

2

Amphion™ Overview

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 2-36 of 38

Optional Components RigSense and WITS RigSense is a stand-alone drilling instrumentation system used to provide drillers and other key personnel with instant access to critical drilling data. It can display, plot, print, export, and archive up to 255 channels of data, which can be retrieved and viewed over the entire life of the well. RigSense transmits and receives Wellsite Information Transfer Specification (WITS) information. WITS is a communication protocol that enables companies operating different computer systems to share information using a standard format for data transfer. RigSense can easily be tailored to any rig’s requirements, and the data can be viewed in either time- or depth-based format. See the MD Totco RigSense manual for more information.

Simple Data Acquisition (S-DAQ™) S-DAQ gathers data from rig sensors and equipment. Drilling parameters are displayed in realtime, in both analog and digital formats. Each channel can be configured with alarm functions. S-DAQ can apply algorithms to the data, then forward the information to applications such as RigSense™. S-DAQ and RigSense communicate using Ethernet.

See Chapter 24, titled "S-DAQ™” for more information.

System 5 Data Acquisition (V-DAQ™) Data for RigSense is supplied by V-DAQ, which gathers data from sensors and equipment. It can apply algorithms to the data, then forward the information to RigSense. V-DAQ and RigSense communicate using Ethernet.

See Chapter 26, titled "V-DAQ™” for more information.

Electronic Driller System™ (EDS) NOV’s Electronic Driller System is built into the drawworks and Amphion touchscreen control systems. EDS is designed to provide a constant drilling state at the bit, which cannot be achieved using manual or other types of drawworks braking systems. The constant bit state is achieved through closed-loop control of selected primary drilling parameters (such as weight on bit or delta pressure), and the ability to regulate the disc brake for continuous feed of the drill line. Continuously running secondary control parameters (rate of penetration and torque) provide additional control necessary for a steady state during unexpected events, such as a drilling break or stick-slip situation.

2-36 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 2-37 of 38

Amphion™ Overview

2

The driller can activate modes through the touchscreens, and adjust individual parameter setpoints.

See product-specific NOV EDS documentation, and Chapter 10, titled "Drawworks” for more information.

2-37 www.nov.com

2

Amphion™ Overview

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 2-38 of 38

2-38 www.nov.com

FINAL DOCUMENTATION Amphion Operator’s Guide

Section 1.3 Alarms & Events

www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 3-1 of 8

Alarms and Events

This chapter contains examples of Amphion operator interface screens and controls, and may or may not represent your particular rig configuration.

System Alarms The navigation menu bar’s Alarms button flashes red when there is at least one active and unacknowledged alarm. The button displays solid red when there is at least one active, but already acknowledged, alarm. Otherwise, the button displays solid blue. When an alarm is triggered (and unacknowledged), the Alarms button flashes red on both the navigation menu and tool menu (for tools that have an active alarm) as shown here. Flashing Red = Active/Unacknowledged Solid Red = Active/Acknowledged

Tool menu Alarms button Navigation menu Alarms button

3-1 www.nov.com

3

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 3-2 of 8

Alarms and Events

Press Alarms on the navigation menu to display the Alarms Menu. Flashing red tool buttons indicate an active and unacknowledged alarm; solid red indicates an active, but acknowledged alarm for that tool. Tools that have no active or unacknowledged alarms display solid blue.

Active/unacknowledged alarm (flashing red)

Alarms Menu

3-2 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 3-3 of 8

Alarms and Events

3

Press to select a tool from the Alarms Menu, or press --> Alarms to display the Alarm Messages window.

The alarm system displays and stores the most recent 200 alarms for the currently-selected tool.

! All alarm data clears when electrical power is removed from the control system.

Alarm Message Display R

Red line items indicate that the alarm condition is active, and the alarm itself has not been acknowledged.

R

Yellow line items indicate that the alarm was acknowledged, but the alarm condition has not been corrected.

R

Orange line items indicate that the alarm condition was corrected, but has not been acknowledged.

R

Grey historical line items indicate that the alarm was acknowledged, and the condition causing the alarm state was corrected.

R

Blue line items are events of interest that have occurred, but do not indicate an alarm condition.

3-3 www.nov.com

3

Alarms and Events

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 3-4 of 8

Alarm and Event Sort The alarms display (Default Sort) in the following order: 1. Unacknowledged/active alarms 2. Unacknowledged/inactive alarms 3. Acknowledged/active alarms 4. Acknowledged/inactive alarms 5. Events Within each category, the alarms are sorted by: 1. Active Date (the date and time the alarm was triggered) 2. Inactive Date (the date and time the alarm condition was corrected) 3. Description (alphabetically by description) Press any of the Sort buttons (located along the top of the screen) to sort by description, active date, or inactive date. R

The Description column displays a general description of the alarm.

R

The Active Date column displays the date and time the alarm was triggered.

R

The Inactive Date column displays the date and time the alarm was cleared.

R

The Acknowledged column displays the date and time the alarm was acknowledged.

Alarm Acknowledgement and Detail Press the Acknowledge Page button (located on the sort bar along the top of the Alarms screen) to acknowledge all alarms currently displayed on the screen. Press any individual alarm to display more detail.

3-4 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 3-5 of 8

Alarms and Events

3

The alarm detail includes an alarm ID, a description of the alarm condition, the date and time that the alarm was tripped, cleared, and acknowledged, as well as its group, priority, and status. The alarm shown here has not been acknowledged. Press Acknowledge to do so, then press Close. The alarm displays yellow to indicate that it has been acknowledged (however, the alarm condition remains active). Press the yellow alarm line item again to view its details if necessary.

Press Close to return to the Alarms window.

3-5 www.nov.com

3

Alarms and Events

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 3-6 of 8

Alarm Setup

Depending on your particular rig configuration, alarms can be set for certain items on some tool screens. See toolspecific chapters to determine whether a particular tool screen offers this feature.

Certain tool screens may contain gauges, bar graphs, or digital readings that have alarm setup capabilities. This depends on your specific rig configuration. Press the gauge, bar graph, or digital reading to display the Alarm Configuration pop-up window.

You can set four alarm levels: high-high, high, low, or low-low. Press Change Level to display the pop-up keypad. Define the alarm value, then press Set to close the keypad. Click Enable or Disable to turn the alarm on or off. Press the description’s Change button to display the keyboard pop-up window. Type a brief description of the alarm into the space provided, then press Enter to close the keyboard. Press Close to close the Alarm Configuration pop-up window and save the values.

3-6 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 3-7 of 8

Alarms and Events

3

Alarm Displays Alarms display on the operator screen. For example, when the reading on a gauge reaches the user-defined high alarm level (but remains below the high-high range), the graph or gauge background displays yellow.

The same is true if the reading reaches the low range (but remains above the low-low range). If the reading reaches the user-defined high-high range, or falls into the low-low range, the background displays red, and the touchscreen computer (or HMI) beeps.

Alarm Sounds Press the gauge, bar graph, or digital reading to display the Alarm Configuration pop-up window. Disable the beeper by pressing the Turn Beeper Off.

3-7 www.nov.com

3

Alarms and Events

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 3-8 of 8

3-8 www.nov.com

FINAL DOCUMENTATION Amphion Operator’s Guide

Section 1.4 Assignments

www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 4-1 of 2

Assignments

This chapter contains examples of Amphion operator interface screens and controls, and may or may not represent your particular rig configuration.

Drawworks/Top Drive Assignments Screen This screen is normally accessed from the Drawworks or Top Drive operator screen, however it can be configured to appear on the operator tool menus as described in this chapter. See Chapter 10, titled "Drawworks,” and Chapter 25, titled "Top Drive System (TDS) for more information. Press Tools --> Assignments to display the DW/TD (Drawworks/Top Drive) Assignments screen.

This screen provides a way for the operator to assign VFD motors to the drawworks and the top drive. It also displays the current status of all VFDs.

4-1 www.nov.com

4

Assignments

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 4-2 of 2

Status Displays R

Ready: Green indicates that the assigned motor is is ready to run.

R

Running: Green indicates that the VFD motor is assigned and running.

R

Fault: Red indicates a fault state.

R

Motor Lockout: Red indicates that the VFD is currently locked out.

Drawworks Select Press any unassigned DW (A, B, C, or D) Select - VFD button to assign it to the drawworks. A green backlight indicates the current selection. Press the Deassign button to remove the assignment. Press the Deassign All DW button to deassign all VFD motors from the drawworks.

See Chapter 10, titled "Drawworks” for more information.

Top Drive Select Press any unassigned Top Drive Select - VFD button to assign the VFD to the top drive. A green backlight indicates the current selection. Press the Deassign button to remove the assignment.

See Chapter 25, titled "Top Drive System (TDS)” for more information.

4-2 www.nov.com

FINAL DOCUMENTATION Amphion Operator’s Guide

Section 1.5 Casing Running Tool (CRT)

www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-0001 Revision 01 Page 5-1 of 20

Casing Running Tool (CRT)

This chapter contains examples of Amphion operator interface screens and controls, and may or may not represent your particular rig configuration.

Operator Screen Press Tools --> Casing Tool to display the Casing Running Tool operator screen.

The CRT is used to make up or break out a casing connection, and run the casing string to a maximum weight of 500 short tons. It is installed on the shaft of the top drive, suspended from the links. The top drive supplies the rotation and torque necessary to make or break a connection.

Tool Ownership Assume ownership of the CRT to enable controls. See section titled "Tool Ownership" on page 234.

5-1 www.nov.com

5

Casing Running Tool (CRT)

D811001248-MAN-0001 Revision 01 Page 5-2 of 20

Readings and Status Displays The left side of the operator screen contains realtime speed and torque graphs that reflect their current values. Black markers indicate user-defined setpoint values. See Chapter 25, titled "Top Drive System (TDS),” and section titled "Speed and Torque Controls" on page 25-4. Current hook load and block height readings display in the top right portion of the screen, next to three status displays.

R

IBOP Closed: Yellow indicates the internal blowout preventer is closed; grey indicates a normal state.

R

Slips Closed: Yellow indicates that the power slips are closed; green indicates that they are open; grey indicates an inactive state. See Chapter 18, titled "Power Slips.”

R

TDS HPU Running: Green indicates that the top drive’s hydraulic power unit is running; grey indicates a normal state.

Top Drive Controls Press Top Drive Fault - Reset to reset faults after the condition has been corrected. Press Top Drive Brake - Off to release the top drive brake.

A green backlight marks the current selection.

5-2 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-0001 Revision 01 Page 5-3 of 20

Casing Running Tool (CRT)

5

IBOP Controls Press the Open or Close button to open or close the internal blowout preventer.

Open allows mud flow; Close stops mud flow. A green backlight marks the current selection.

Gripper Displays and Controls The Gripper Closed indicator displays green when the gripper is fully closed.

Press Gripper - Open to place pipe into the gripper. Press Gripper - Armed to close the gripper.

The gripper must detect pipe before it will close.

A green backlight marks the current selection.

5-3 www.nov.com

5

Casing Running Tool (CRT)

D811001248-MAN-0001 Revision 01 Page 5-4 of 20

CRT Elevator Displays and Controls The Elevator Closed indicator displays green when the elevator is fully closed. Press the CRT Elevator - Open or Close buttons to control the CRT elevator.

A green backlight marks the current selection.

Link Tilt Controls Press the Link Tilt - Drill, Float, or Tilt buttons to control the elevator bales:

R

Use Drill to tilt the elevator bales backward into a position that allows drilling operations to proceed.

R

Use Float to allow the elevator bales to move into a neutral position.

R

Use Tilt to tilt the elevator bales forward into a position that allows the elevator to latch onto the pipe.

A green backlight marks the current selection.

5-4 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-0001 Revision 01 Page 5-5 of 20

Casing Running Tool (CRT)

5

CRT Rotation Controls Press the CRT Rotation - Break or Spin-In button to define a rotation mode. R

Break turns the CRT counter-clockwise and applies full available torque.

R

Spin-In turns the CRT clockwise, and applies torque and speed limits.

A green backlight marks the current selection.

Rotate and Lower Press Rotate & Lower to display the Spin-In screen and controls.

Press Start to begin rotating and lowering the CRT in Spin-In mode. Press Stop to stop the process. The graphs located on the left side of the screen display real-time speed and torque data. Press Exit to return to the main CRT operator screen.

5-5 www.nov.com

5

Casing Running Tool (CRT)

D811001248-MAN-0001 Revision 01 Page 5-6 of 20

Make Controls Press Make to display the Make-Up screen.

Press and hold Make-Up to activate the connection sequence. The graph area displays realtime torque and turns data, while the status text area provides information regarding the sequence progress. The Pass or Fail displays indicate whether or not the connection was successful. Release Make-Up to stop the sequence. Depending on the position in the sequence and the pipe type settings, you may be able to resume the sequence by pressing the Make-Up button again.

ISee the product-specific service manual for more information regarding sequence troubleshooting.

Press Accept or Reject as appropriate to save the connection data. Press Exit to return to the previous screen.

Press Details to display the CRT Review screen. See section titled "CRT Review" on page 5-17.

5-6 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-0001 Revision 01 Page 5-7 of 20

Casing Running Tool (CRT)

5

Casing Running Tool Menu Press the Casing Tool button to display its tool menu.

See section titled "Utility Menu" on page 2-13.

See section titled "Common Diagnostics Menu" on page 2-19.

See Chapter 3, titled "Alarms and Events.”

See section titled "Operator Screen" on page 5-1.

See section titled "CRT Review" on page 5-17.

See section titled "CRT Setup" on page 5-8.

5-7 www.nov.com

5

D811001248-MAN-0001 Revision 01 Page 5-8 of 20

Casing Running Tool (CRT)

CRT Setup Press Casing Tool --> Setup to display the CRT Setup screen.

Descriptions and Comments Press any of the CRT Setup screen’s Edit buttons to display its keypad or keyboard pop-up window. Keypad

Keyboard

Type the information into the space provided, then press Enter to close the key pad or keyboard. At the CRT Setup screen, press Save to store the data.

5-8 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-0001 Revision 01 Page 5-9 of 20

Casing Running Tool (CRT)

5

Pipe Type Settings Press Pipe Type to display the Current Pipe Type Settings screen.

Press Exit to use the current setup file.

See section titled "Editing an Existing Setup File" on page 5-11 for information about naming files.

5-9 www.nov.com

5

Casing Running Tool (CRT)

D811001248-MAN-0001 Revision 01 Page 5-10 of 20

Loading an Existing Setup File At the Current Pipe Type Settings screen, press Load to display the Preview Pipe Type Settings screen.

1. Either press Use to use the current setup, then skip to step 4, or; Press Select to display the file selection screen and use a different setup file.

5-10 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-0001 Revision 01 Page 5-11 of 20

Casing Running Tool (CRT)

5

Use the blue arrow up or down keys to scroll through the file list (single arrows scroll line- by-line; double arrows scroll page up or page down). 2. Highlight a file, then press Set to confirm your selection. The currently selected file name displays along the bottom of the window. 3. Press Load to return to the Preview Pipe Type Settings screen, then press Use. 4. Press Exit to return to the Current Pipe Type Settings screen. 5. Press Exit again to return to the CRT Setup screen.

Editing an Existing Setup File 1. At the Current Pipe Type Settings screen, press Edit to display the Pipe Type Category Edit pop-up window.

2. Press Edit to select the category you wish to change. See section titled "Pipe Type Category Edit Pop-Up Windows" on page 5-14. 3. After making changes to the categories, press Exit display the Preview Pipe Type Settings screen.

5-11 www.nov.com

5

Casing Running Tool (CRT)

D811001248-MAN-0001 Revision 01 Page 5-12 of 20

See the product-specific service manual for information regarding default units of measure for each setting.

4. Review the changes, then press Use to activate the settings. 5. Press Exit to return to the Current Pipe Type Settings screen. 6. To save the edited file using a different name, press Edit to display the Pipe Type Category Edit pop-up window, then follow the remaining steps of this procedure. To over-write the existing file, press Save, then press Load to return to the CRT Setup screen. (Skip the remaining steps of this procedure.)

5-12 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-0001 Revision 01 Page 5-13 of 20

Casing Running Tool (CRT)

5

7. Press the Other Settings - Edit button to display the following pop-up window.

8. Press the Pipe Type - Edit button to display the keyboard to enter a new file name. 9. Press Exit to return to the Preview Pipe Type Edit pop-up window (shown on page 5-12). 10. At the Preview Pipe Type Edit pop-up window, review the settings, then press Use to load the activate the settings and display the Current Pipe Type Settings screen (shown on page 5-9). 11. Press Save to store the new file to the system. 12. Press Exit to return to the CRT Setup screen.

5-13 www.nov.com

5

Casing Running Tool (CRT)

D811001248-MAN-0001 Revision 01 Page 5-14 of 20

Pipe Type Category Edit Pop-Up Windows R

Cross-Thread Settings

R

Spin-In Settings

R

Make-Up Settings

5-14 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-0001 Revision 01 Page 5-15 of 20

R

On-Shoulder Settings

R

Over-Turns Settings

R

Other Settings

Casing Running Tool (CRT)

5

5-15 www.nov.com

5

Casing Running Tool (CRT)

D811001248-MAN-0001 Revision 01 Page 5-16 of 20

Calibrate At the CRT Setup screen (shown on page 5-8), press Calibrate to display the CRT Calibration screen.

Press any of the CRT Torque or Load Cell Torque - Edit buttons to adjust the values. Press Save to store the calibration data, then press Exit to return to the CRT Setup screen.

5-16 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-0001 Revision 01 Page 5-17 of 20

Casing Running Tool (CRT)

5

CRT Review Press Casing Tool --> Review to display the CRT Review screen.

By default, the Review screen displays torque (y-axis) versus turns (x-axis) for the currently selected connection file.

Selecting and Loading a Setup File Press Load to display the File Selection pop-up window.

Use the blue arrow up or down keys to scroll through the file list (single arrows scroll line-by-line; double arrows scroll page up or page down). Highlight, then press Set to confirm your selection.

5-17 www.nov.com

5

Casing Running Tool (CRT)

D811001248-MAN-0001 Revision 01 Page 5-18 of 20

The currently-selected file name selected displays along the bottom of the window. Press Load to display the Review screen again. Press Refresh to display the new setup file in the Review screen.

See section titled "Editing an Existing Setup File" on page 5-11 for information about naming files.

Changing Graph Display Properties Y or X Axis Press X or Y toggle buttons to change the data being displayed between torque, time, and turns.

Mark Shoulder Point Press Special Point to place a red “x” on the graph when the system detects a shoulder point.

Highlight Minimum and Maximum Values Press Hi-Lite to highlight relevant minimum and maximum torque and turn values. The highlighted portion is the area where all four lines create a rectangular area (as shown here).

The x- and y-axes must be set to Torque and Turn in order for the Hi-Lite feature to display correctly.

5-18 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-0001 Revision 01 Page 5-19 of 20

Casing Running Tool (CRT)

5

Zoom (Y or X) In or Out Press Zoom (Y or X) In or Out to zoom in or out. Pressing the button once zooms in to magnify the graph to twice its 1:1 scale (2x). Press again to magnify to 4x; again to magnify to 8x, and so on. Press Zoom Out repeatedly to return to the 1:1 (or 1x) scale.

When using the Zoom In feature, you can press (or click) and drag the graph to display the data points you are most interested in.

Display Data Points (Dots) or Lines By default, the graph displays raw data points (dots). Press Dots/Line toggle button to change the display from dots to a line raw data points (dots) and solid line.

Fill Graph Display Press the Fill toggle button to fill in the lower half of the graph (as shown here). Press again to remove the fill.

Turn and Torque Readings Digital Shoulder Turns, Shoulder Torque, Peak Turns, and Peak Torque readings display in the bottom portion of the screen.

5-19 www.nov.com

5

Casing Running Tool (CRT)

D811001248-MAN-0001 Revision 01 Page 5-20 of 20

5-20 www.nov.com

FINAL DOCUMENTATION Amphion Operator’s Guide

Section 1.6 Cathead

www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 6-1 of 6

Cathead

This chapter contains examples of Amphion operator interface screens and controls, and may or may not represent your particular rig configuration.

Operator Screen Press Tools --> Cathead to display the Cathead operator screen.

Tool Ownership Assume ownership of the cathead to enable controls. See section titled "Tool Ownership" on page 2-34.

Status Displays The left side of the operator screen contains vertical realtime torque and pull force graphs that reflect their current values. Black markers indicate their user-defined setpoint values. The Slow Speed light located along the top of the screen displays green to indicate that the mode is active. See section titled "Slow Mode" on page 6-3.

6-1 www.nov.com

6

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 6-2 of 6

Cathead

The Maintenance Mode light displays yellow to indicate that maintenance mode is active. See section titled "Maintenance Mode" on page 2-11.

Cathead Selection Press Select Cathead - Break Out or Make Up.

A green backlight marks the current selection.

Stream Controls Press the Stream Controls - Pay or Pull button to define the direction of the cathead.

This function may also be controlled using the Cathead - Pay/Pull discrete switch, usually located on the operator workstation’s right control panel (depending on your particular rig configuration).

L TOO IP H ERS OWN SE ALL A RELE ZMS E RRID OVE

D EC

REA

SE

IN

ASE CRE

AIR KING E WOR R CMC PRESSU APV

SE/ CLO K LOC

N/ OPE AUTO

OW LIC FL RAU ALVE HYD V CMC UT OFF SH SE CLO N OPE

MAIN CMC E VALV

PULL

PULL PAY

PAY

EAD CATH

CATH

EAD

6-2 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 6-3 of 6

Cathead

6

Slow Mode Press the Slow Mode button to operate the cathead at a slower speed during pull-in operations. Slow mode has no effect on pay-out operations; it is automatically energized during the first second to prevent the line from snapping (due to tension being released too quickly) then deenergized to allow pay out at normal speed.

The Slow Speed light located along the top of the screen displays green to indicate that the mode is active.

Defining Tong Length Press Tong Length to display its keypad pop-up window.

Define the tong length value, then press Set to confirm and close the keypad.

6-3 www.nov.com

6

Cathead

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 6-4 of 6

Defining Torque Setpoint

Define the tong length value (see section titled "Defining Tong Length" on page 6-3 above) before defining the torque setpoint value.

Press Torque Setpoint to display its keypad pop-up window.

Define the torque setpoint value, then press Set to confirm and close the keypad. Use the arrow up or down keys to adjust the setpoint value as needed.

Pull Force The current Pull Force and Pull Force Setpoint values display to the right of the Torque and Tong Length Setpoint controls. The system calculates the Pull Force Setpoint value, dividing the torque setpoint by the tong length to define the appropriate hydraulic pressure required to achieve the specified line pull value.

If the operator presses Pull before the closed loop control system reaches the appropriate pressure value, an interlock message displays (“pressure setpoint not reached”). Once the pressure setpoint is reached, the interlock clears, and the pull can continue normally. During the actual pull operation, the pressure output is static, so the loop is inactive.

6-4 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 6-5 of 6

Cathead

6

Cathead Tool Menu Press the Cathead button to display its tool menu.

See section titled "Utility Menu" on page 2-13.

See section titled "Common Diagnostics Menu" on page 2-19.

See Chapter 3, titled "Alarms and Events.”

See section titled "Maintenance Mode" on page 2-11.

See section titled "Operator Screen" on page 6-1.

6-5 www.nov.com

6

Cathead

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 6-6 of 6

6-6 www.nov.com

FINAL DOCUMENTATION Amphion Operator’s Guide

Section 1.7 Chairs (Workstations)

www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 7-1 of 12

Chairs (Workstations)

This chapter contains examples of Amphion operator interface screens and controls, and may or may not represent your particular rig configuration.

Workstation Status Screens There are minor differences between the driller and assistant driller’s Chair Status screens, such as object arrangement. However, they both function as a workstation diagnostic screen. Press Driller Tools --> Driller Chair to display the driller’s Chair Status screen.

7-1 www.nov.com

7

Chairs (Workstations)

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 7-2 of 12

Press AD Tools --> Assistant Chair to display the assistant driller’s Chair Status screen.

Tool Signals A green tool background indicates that the operator has ownership of the tool (as shown here).

Green tool signals indicate the current tool operation, or the position of the switch or joystick. When the operator is not actuating the switch or button, the signal display is grey (such as the Racker Jaw displays shown above). Green signal displays also confirm that the signal from the discrete switch to the workstation’s remote I/O and tool controller was successfully received. Failure to display green when the workstation’s switch or button is actuated indicates a faulty switch or I/O point.

See section titled "Operator Workstation" on page 2-3 for information about workstation controls.

7-2 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 7-3 of 12

Chairs (Workstations)

7

Joystick Status A green joystick background indicates that the joystick is in use (as shown here).

The yellow indicator on the graphs display the current position of the joystick or top wheel. If the display does not depict the correct position (for example, if the joystick is pressed forward, but the yellow indicator is not at the top of the y-axis), recalibrate the joystick. (See section titled "Joystick Calibration" on page 7-10.) Green JS Buttons display indicates that the associated button on the joystick is depressed. See section titled "Deadman Override" on page 7-4 below.

Chair Status

R

24VDC PS (#1 and #2): Green indicates that the 24-volt DC power supplies are working properly. Red indicates a fault state.

R

Ethernet Switch (#1 and #2): Green indicates that the Ethernet switches are communicating properly. Red indicates a fault state.

7-3 www.nov.com

7

Chairs (Workstations)

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 7-4 of 12

Deadman Override The trigger mounted on the front of the right joystick (also referred to as a “dead man switch”) must be depressed in order to operate the drawworks or racker, unless the override is engaged. Press and hold the Deadman Override to operate the joystick without regard to the trigger.

7-4 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 7-5 of 12

Chairs (Workstations)

7

Chair Tool Menu Press the Chair button to display the workstation menu.

See section titled "Utility Menu" on page 2-13.

See section titled "Common Diagnostics Menu" on page 2-19.

See Chapter 3, titled "Alarms and Events.”

See section titled "Calibration" on page 7-10.

See section titled "Status" on page 7-6.

See section titled "Workstation Status Screens" on page 7-1.

7-5 www.nov.com

7

Chairs (Workstations)

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 7-6 of 12

Status Press Chair --> Status to display the Status menu.

Multi-Tool Controller (MTC) Status Press Chair --> Status --> MTC Status to display the default LER MTC A Status screen.

The default screen is related to the local electrical room (LER) and MTC A.

See general descriptions of status indicators later in this chapter.

Press the appropriate buttons located in the top right portion of the screen to select another status screen. The currently-selected screen’s button displays green.

7-6 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 7-7 of 12

Chairs (Workstations)

7

Press LER MTC B to display the LER MTC B Status screen.

Press LVR MTC A to display the LVR MTC A Status screen.

7-7 www.nov.com

7

Chairs (Workstations)

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 7-8 of 12

Press LVR MTC B to display the LVR MTC B Status screen.

R

OLM: Green indicates that the optical link modules are working properly; red indicates a fault state.

R

Ethernet (Switches and Media Converters): Green indicates that the Ethernet switches and converters are communicating properly; red indicates a fault state.

R

PS - 24 VDC Monitor: Green indicates that the 24-volt DC power supplies are working properly; red indicates a fault state.

R

The ZMS Lockout light displays red to indicate that ZMS lockout is engaged; grey indicates an idle state. See Chapter 27, titled "Zone Management System (ZMS)” for more information.

7-8 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 7-9 of 12

Chairs (Workstations)

7

Emergency Stop (E-Stop) Status Press Chair --> Status --> Estop Status to display the E-Stop Status screen.

Red displays indicate the emergency stop is engaged. The text next to the display indicates the emergency stop type and location

7-9 www.nov.com

7

Chairs (Workstations)

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 7-10 of 12

Calibration Press Chair --> Calibration to display the Calibration menu.

Joystick Calibration Press Chair --> Calibration --> Joystick Calibration to display the Joystick Calibration screen.

Press the Calibrate - Start button to begin. The joystick remains in calibration mode for twenty seconds. Start with the joystick in the center (resting) position, and verify that the yellow on-screen indicator is located in the center of the X and Y axes (as shown above). Move the joystick through its full range of motion during the twenty second period. The Success light displays green to indicate a successful calibration. The Failure light displays red to indicate a failed calibration. Repeat the procedure until calibration is successful.

7-10 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 7-11 of 12

Chairs (Workstations)

7

Hook Load Calibration Press Chair --> Hook Load Calibration to display the Hook Load Calibration screen.

! This process calibrates the value displayed on the operator workstation’s hook load gauge. It does not affect calibration of the hook load sensors themselves. Use this calibration procedure only if the workstation gauge does not correspond to the values displayed on the Drawworks screen. See Chapter 10, titled "Drawworks.”

Press Begin to start the hook load gauge calibration process. Follow screen prompts to complete the calibration process. Press Cancel to stop the calibration process.

7-11 www.nov.com

7

Chairs (Workstations)

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 7-12 of 12

7-12 www.nov.com

FINAL DOCUMENTATION Amphion Operator’s Guide

Section 1.8 Crown-Mounted Compensator (CMC)

www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 8-1 of 6

Crown-Mounted Compensator (CMC)

This chapter contains examples of Amphion operator interface screens and controls, and may or may not represent your particular rig configuration.

Operator Screen Press Tools --> Compensator to display the Compensator operator screen.

Tool Ownership Assume ownership of the compensator to enable controls. See section titled "Tool Ownership" on page 2-34.

Status Displays The left side of the operator screen contains realtime air, fluid, and position graphs that reflect their current values. A blue bar rises and falls to mark the values. The graphs also contain digital readings.

8-1 www.nov.com

8

Crown-Mounted Compensator (CMC)

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 8-2 of 6

HP (Hydraulic Pump) Oil System R

Tank Level: A text box and a status light indicate the current tank level status. Black indicates that the pump unit is idle; green indicates that the pump unit is running, and tank levels are normal; yellow indicates that the tank level has reached either its high or low alarm limit; red indicates that the tank level has reached its high-high alarm limit.

R

Pump Status: A text box and status lights indicate the current pump status. Black indicates that the pump is stopped; green indicates that the pump is running normally; red indicates a fault or alarm state. The Auto light displays green when the pump is in Automatic mode.

Low Instrument Air Alarm The Low Instrument Air status indicator displays red if the air pressure falls below an acceptable level. Press the Alarm Acknowledge button to acknowledge the alarm.

! Acknowledging the alarm does not correct the condition. See Chapter 3, titled "Alarms and Events.”

Position Status Position status lights display green to indicate the current position.

Valve Status Valve status lights display green to indicate that they are On (Open), or yellow to indicate that they are Off (Closed).

Control Location A text box displays the compensator’s currently-assigned control location (Amphion or Local). If the operator takes control using the Amphion screen (see section titled "Tool Ownership" on page 8-1), the CMC can only be controlled using the Amphion interface.

8-2 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 8-3 of 6

Crown-Mounted Compensator (CMC)

8

Hydraulic Valve Controls Press Hydraulic Valve - Open or Close to open or close the hydraulic valve. This function may also be controlled using the discrete switch, usually located on the operator workstation’s right control panel (depending on your particular rig configuration).

L TOO IP H ERS OWN SE ALL A RELE ZMS E RRID OVE

N/ OPE AUTO

SE/ CLO K LOC

D EC

SE REA

SE/ CLO K LOC

N/ OPE AUTO

EASE INCR

OW LIC FL RAU ALVE H YD V CMC UT OFF SH

AIR KING E WOR R CMC PRESSU APV

SE CLO N OPE

FLOW ULIC DRA VALVE Y H CMC UT OFF SH

MAIN CMC E VALV

PULL PAY

EAD CATH

Main Air Valve Controls Press Main Air Valve - Open or Close to open or close the main air valve. This function may also be controlled using the discrete switch located on the operator workstation’s right control panel (depending on your particular rig configuration).

L TOO IP H ERS OWN SE ALL A RELE ZMS E RRID OVE

D EC

REA

SE

EASE INCR

AIR KING E WOR R CMC PRESSU APV

SE/ CLO K LOC

N/ OPE AUTO

OW LIC FL RAU ALVE HYD V CMC UT OFF SH SE CLO N OPE

SE

CLO

MAIN CMC E VALV

PEN

O

PULL PAY

MAIN CMC VE VAL

EAD CATH

8-3 www.nov.com

8

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 8-4 of 6

Crown-Mounted Compensator (CMC)

CMC Pressure Controls Press CMC Pressure - Decrease or Increase to decrease or increase the CMC pressure. The working pressure displays above the screen controls. This function may also be controlled using the discrete switch located on the operator workstation’s right control panel (depending on your particular rig configuration).

L TOO IP H ERS OWN SE ALL A RELE ZMS E RRID OVE

ASE

SE REA

D EC

SE REA

EASE INCR

E INCR

DEC

AIR KING E WOR R CMC PRESSU APV

SE/ CLO K LOC

N/ OPE AUTO

OW LIC FL RAU ALVE HYD V CMC UT OFF SH SE CLO N OPE

MAIN CMC E VALV

AIR KING E WOR R C M C PR E S S U APV

PULL PAY

EAD CATH

Position Preset Press Position Preset to display the Position Preset pop-up window.

Press the Position Preset - Activate to activate the preset position. Press the Encoder Select - A or B button to select an encoder. The status light displays green to indicate the current selection. Press Close to close the pop-up window and return to the Compensator operator screen.

8-4 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 8-5 of 6

Crown-Mounted Compensator (CMC)

8

Compensator Tool Menu Press the Compensator button to display its tool menu.

See section titled "Utility Menu" on page 2-13.

See section titled "Common Diagnostics Menu" on page 2-19.

See Chapter 3, titled "Alarms and Events.”

8-5 www.nov.com

8

Crown-Mounted Compensator (CMC)

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 8-6 of 6

8-6 www.nov.com

FINAL DOCUMENTATION Amphion Operator’s Guide

Section 1.9 Conveyor

www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 9-7 of 12

Conveyor

This chapter contains examples of Amphion operator interface screens and controls, and may or may not represent your particular rig configuration.

Operator Screen Press Tools --> Conveyor to display the Conveyor (also referred to as the Horizontal Pipe Conveyor, or HPC) operator screen.

Tool Ownership Assume ownership of the conveyor to enable controls. See section titled "Tool Ownership" on page 2-34.

9-7 www.nov.com

9

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 9-8 of 12

Conveyor

Status Displays and Alarms Status indicators and alarms display across the top of the Conveyor operator screen.

Tool On

Displays green when the current workstation has ownership of the conveyor.

E-Stop

Displays red if the emergency stop is engaged, or grey if it is not.

Maintenance Mode

Displays green when maintenance mode is engaged, or grey if it is not. See section titled "Maintenance Mode" on page 2-11.

Hydraulics Alarm

Displays red if the hydraulic pressure falls below or exceeds an acceptable level. Displays grey if pressure is OK.

Interlock

Displays red if an interlock is preventing further movement of the conveyor.

Operator messages display along the bottom of the screen.

Tool Mode Controls Tool mode controls are located in the top left portion of the Conveyor operator screen.

Auto Sequence Press the Auto Sequence toggle button to start or stop auto sequence mode.

Use Auto Sequence mode to step through tool operations. This mode moves the conveyor belt automatically when the operator presses the Belt - Feed In or Feed Out buttons. (See section titled "Belt Controls and Pipe Length Display" on page 9-10.) After releasing the Belt - Feed In or Feed Out button, the pipe continues feeding until it reaches its destination. A green backlight indicates that auto sequence mode is active.

9-8 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 9-9 of 12

Conveyor

9

Slow Speed Press the Slow Speed button to operate the conveyor belt at a slower speed.

Warm Up Press the Warm Up Mode - On button to start warm-up mode.

Use Warm-up mode to warm up the conveyor hydraulics. This includes a flushing cycle that generates heat by passing oil over a conveyor orifice, then circulating it through the manifold and conveyor motor gear case, followed by a pre-programmed idle period. A green backlight indicates that the mode is active.

Idle Mode Press the Idle Mode - On button to start idle mode.

Use Idle mode to begin a low speed rotation of the conveyor belt and powered rollers to maintain a readiness condition. A green backlight indicates that the mode is active.

9-9 www.nov.com

9

Conveyor

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 9-10 of 12

Belt Controls and Pipe Length Display Press and hold the Belt - Feed Out or Feed In buttons to define the conveyor’s feed direction and move the belt.

A green backlight indicates the current selection. The belt operates at its normal speed, unless slow mode is engaged (while in slow mode, it moves at its minimum speed). When Auto Sequence mode is not active, the operator must continue pressing the Belt - Feed In or Feed Out button to continue moving the belt.

See section titled "Auto Sequence" on page 9-8, and section titled "Slow Speed" on page 9-9.

A digital reading of the current system-calculated pipe length displays above the controls.

9-10 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 9-11 of 12

Conveyor

9

Pipe Positioner Controls and Displays Press the Pipe Positioner - Retract or Extend button to retract or extend the tailing arm assembly.

A green backlight indicates the current selection. Green Stowed, At Pickup, and At Handoff displays indicate the pipe positioner’s current position; grey indicates an idle state.

Pipe Lifter Controls and Displays Press the Pipe Lifter - Down or Up button to move the pipe lifter down or up.

A green backlight indicates the current selection. A green Stowed display indicates that the pipe lifter is in the stowed position; grey indicates an idle state.

9-11 www.nov.com

9

Conveyor

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 9-12 of 12

Conveyor Tool Menu Press the Conveyor main menu button to display its tool menu.

See section titled "Utility Menu" on page 2-13.

See section titled "Common Diagnostics Menu" on page 2-19.

See Chapter 3, titled "Alarms and Events.”

See section titled "Maintenance Mode" on page 2-11.

See section titled "Operator Screen" on page 9-7.

9-12 www.nov.com

FINAL DOCUMENTATION Amphion Operator’s Guide

Section 1.10 Drawworks

www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 10-1 of 50

Drawworks

This chapter contains examples of Amphion operator interface screens and controls, and may or may not represent your particular rig configuration.

Tripping and Drilling The left side of both the Drawworks Tripping and Drawworks Drilling screens contain many common components, with a few exceptions. Components for both screens are addressed here. Press Tools --> Drawworks to display the (default) Drawworks Tripping screen.

Press Drawworks --> Drilling to display the Drawworks Drilling screen. See illustration on the following page and the section titled "Drawworks Menu" on page 10-25.

10-1 www.nov.com

10

Drawworks

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 10-2 of 50

Tool Ownership Assume ownership of the drawworks from the Drawworks Tripping screen. See section titled "Tool Ownership" on page 2-34.

Hook Load Reading The current hook load weight displays in the top left corner of both the Drawworks Drilling and Drawworks Tripping screens.

10-2 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 10-3 of 50

Drawworks

10

Fault and Status Displays The left side of the Drawworks Tripping and Drawworks Drilling screens contain basic status displays and may also contain crown-mounted compensator (CMC) status information, depending on your particular rig configuration.

E-Stop

Displays red if a category 0 emergency stop is engaged.

ADS CAT2 Stop

Displays red if a category 2 emergency stop is detected.

ADS Soft Trip

Displays red if a drawworks soft trip is detected.

Brake System

Displays red if a fault is detected in the brake system.

Drive System

Displays red if a fault is detected in the drive system.

Chair System

Displays red if a fault is detected with the workstation controls.

Other Alarms

Displays red if an auxiliary fault occurs.

Override

Displays red when the override is engaged.

Power Limit

Displays red when the drawworks variable frequency drives (VFDs) and motors reach a predefined power limit value. See Chapter 19, titled "Power System.”

CSB Deployed

Displays red when the casing stabbing basket is not in its home position, or grey when it is. If the CSB is not parked, the drawworks speed is reduced to 10% of the user-defined speed settings.

ZMS Off

Displays black when the Zone Management System is enabled; red when it is disabled.

10-3 www.nov.com

10

Drawworks

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 10-4 of 50

CMC (Sensor Fault, Comm Fault, Locked, Inhibit Unlock)

Displays red when an alarm or fault condition exists.

Trip Tank Valve

Green Opened or Closed displays indicate the current trip tank valve position.

See the NOV model-specific drawworks “Alarm & Fault Response Specification” document for detailed drawworks alarm information. Also see section titled "Alarm Definitions" on page 10-49, and Chapter 3, titled "Alarms and Events.”

A Standpipe Pressure reading, located in the top right corner of both the Drawworks Drilling and Drawworks Tripping screens, displays the current pressure sensor reading.

10-4 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 10-5 of 50

Drawworks

10

Parking Brake Status Displays Individual parking brake graphs and a digital reading located in the bottom left corner of the screen displays current pressure. The current Park Status (Parked or Not Parked) text displays beneath the derrick graphic.

Parking Brake Controls This function is normally controlled using the operator workstation’s left control panel Parking Brake discrete switch (Off/Auto or Close).

DRIL

L

TDS

LINK

TILT

FLO

AT

OPE

N

TDS

CLO

SE

LINK

OPE

N CLO SE

TDS EL

OFF /AUT O

EVA TOR RAC

KER

ON JAW

OFF

/AUT O ON

DRA W OVE WORKS RR

IDE

PAR K

DOLL Y

ING

BRA

KE

PAR K

ING

BRA

KE

ENA

BLE SLIP S EN

OPE N

ABLE

CLO SE

IBOP

10-5 www.nov.com

10

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 10-6 of 50

Drawworks

Derrick Graphics The Drawworks Tripping screen derrick graphic contains markers for both high and low travel limits and stops. The Drawworks Drilling screen graphic also contains markers for high travel limits, and a yellow Drill Stop Point marker (low travel stops are not marked). Proximity indicators on both screens display red to indicate a fault or open circuit state.

High travel limit High travel stop Proximity switches

Block and elevator positions Low travel stop Low travel limit Tripping screen

Drill stop point Drilling screen

10-6 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 10-7 of 50

Drawworks

10

Block and Elevator Height Displays The top of the block and the elevator position displays to the right of the derrick graphic on both the Drawworks Tripping and Drawworks Drilling screens.

Red block and elevator position backgrounds indicate that the block requires calibration. See section titled "Block and Elevator Position Calibration" on page 10-38.

Defining Block Travel Limits and Stop Values The Drawworks Tripping screen contains controls for defining block travel limits and stops. The Drawworks Drilling screen displays the high travel user-defined values, however they can only be changed at the Drawworks Tripping screen. The Drawworks Drilling screen does not display low travel values. See section titled "Defining the Drill Stop Point Value" on page 10-9.

High Travel Limit and Stop Press High Travel Limit or High Travel Stop to display the appropriate keypad.

Highest block height

High block stop point

10-7 www.nov.com

10

Drawworks

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 10-8 of 50

Use the High Travel Limit keypad to define the maximum block height value, then press Set to confirm the value and close the keypad. Use the High Travel Stop keypad to define the high travel stop value. The block stops here before reaching its maximum travel limit. Press Set to confirm the value and close the keypad. To continue travel to the High Travel Limit after stopping at the High Travel Stop, zero the joystick (return to home position), then move the joystick again in the hoist direction.

Low Travel Limit and Stop Press Low Travel Limit or Low Travel Stop to display the appropriate keypad.

Lowest block height

Low block stop point

Use the Low Travel Limit keypad to define the lowest possible block height value, then press Set to confirm the value and close the keypad. Use the Low Travel Stop keypad to define the low travel stop value. The block stops here before reaching its Low Travel Limit. Press Set to confirm the value and close the keypad. To continue travel to the Low Travel Limit after stopping at the Low Travel Stop, zero the joystick (return to home position), then move the joystick again in the lower direction.

10-8 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 10-9 of 50

Drawworks

10

Defining the Drill Stop Point Value At the Drawworks Drilling screen, press Drill Stop Point to display its keypad.

Use the Drill Stop Point keypad to define a Drill Stop Point value. R

Enter a negative value to allow the elevators to travel below the drill floor, and the Link-Tilt feature of the top drive to be used. When the links are fully retracted (in Drill mode), the top drive elevators are raised several feet above their normal (Float) position. The blocks are then able to travel to a lower position before the elevators come in contact with the drill floor.

R

Enter a positive value if the elevators are not retracted.

Press Set to confirm the value and close the keypad.

10-9 www.nov.com

10

Drawworks

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 10-10 of 50

Defining CMC Position Setpoint Values At the Drawworks Tripping screen, press CMC Position - Upper or Lower to display its keypad.

Use the keypad to define a value. Press Set to confirm the value and close the keypad.

See Chapter 8, titled "Crown-Mounted Compensator (CMC)” for more information about the CMC interface.

Defining Maximum Block Speeds At the Drawworks Tripping screen, press Max Hoist Speed or Max Lower Speed to display its keypad.

Define maximum speed values, then press Set to confirm and close the keypad.

10-10 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 10-11 of 50

Drawworks

10

Markers on the hoist gauge indicate active speed limits.

The maximum hoisting and lowering speed values are limited by the number of lines strung. Other system constraints (such as hook load) can limit travel speeds.

Lowering and Hoisting Controls This function is controlled by moving the operator workstation right control panel’s Drawworks joystick forward (Lower) or backward (Hoist).

Buttons not used Dead man switch

Lower

Hoist

See section titled "Defining Maximum Block Speeds" on page 10-10, and section titled "Auto Reaming Setup" on page 10-23.

The joystick can control either the drawworks or the racker, depending on tool ownership, and your rig configuration. Tool ownership logic prevents the operator from owning both the drawworks and the racker simultaneously. See section titled "Tool Ownership" on page 2-34, Chapter 20, titled "Racker (Bridge Racker),” and Chapter 21, titled "Racker (Pipe Racking System PRS)” for more information.

10-11 www.nov.com

10

Drawworks

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 10-12 of 50

Defining a Maximum Pull Limit Use the Max Pull Limit controls to define a maximum hook load weight for the drawworks. The value set here depends upon the operation being performed. This value is used to calculate a velocity limit during hoisting. The actual measured hook load during hoisting operations may be slightly higher or lower than the value entered, as the measurement is taken at one end (deadline).

The velocity limit does not override the deceleration rates of the system. Therefore, if the limit is reached and the system is moving fast, it decelerates according to the calculated deceleration rate. This could cause a large overshoot of the entered hook load value. Use caution when running in tight formation. This protection cannot prevent against over-pull in every situation. It is ultimately the driller’s responsibility to prevent over-pull.

Press Max Pull Limit to display its keypad.

Define a maximum weight value for the drawworks, then press Set to confirm the value and close the keypad.

Max Pull Limit controls and values are available only on the Tripping screen.

10-12 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 10-13 of 50

10

Drawworks

Defining the Drawworks Mode At the Drawworks Tripping screen, press Slow Mode to operate the drawworks at 10% of the user-defined maximum speed. See section titled "Defining Maximum Block Speeds" on page 1010.

At the Drawworks Tripping screen, press Mode Select to display the automated drawworks system ADS Mode Select window.

Press to select a mode (see general descriptions below).

Normal Use to operate the drawworks at 100% of the maximum speed.

Brake Only Use in power loss situations. Brake Only mode allows free spooling of the drill line and limits operation of the drawworks to brake use only, at the user-defined maximum speed. See section titled "Defining Maximum Block Speeds" on page 10-10.

10-13 www.nov.com

10

Drawworks

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 10-14 of 50

Slip & Cut While this mode is active, the drum speed is limited to the user-defined value (maximum drum spool speed), and all position-based limits and safeties are disabled. In other words, this mode allows free spooling of the drill line and block without position protection. All brake functions are normal.

Slip & Cut mode bypasses High and Low Travel Limit settings, allowing free movement of the block without position protection. Potential damage to equipment or injury to personnel exists. Exercise extreme caution in this mode.

1. Ensure that motors are assigned and auxiliaries are turned on. 2. Press to select Slip & Cut mode to display the Confirm Slip & Cut Operation popup window.

3. Press Yes! Start Slip & Cut from Driller Chair or Local Station to display the associated Slip & Cut Control screen (see below). Alternatively, press No to abort the procedure and return to the previous screen.

10-14 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 10-15 of 50

Drawworks

Driller Chair

10

Local Station

4. Press the RPM button to display the maximum drum speed keypad.

5. Define a maximum drum revolution speed value using the keypad, then press Set to confirm and close the keypad. 6. If you choose to perform this procedure from the driller’s chair: Q

After closing the keypad, press OK, then perform the necessary slip and cut operations.

Q

Press Close. The drawworks mode resets to Normal, and the operation is complete.

If you choose to perform this procedure from the local station: Q

After closing the keypad, the following pop-up window appears:

10-15 www.nov.com

10

Drawworks

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 10-16 of 50

7. Press Transfer To Local to request that control be transferred to the local control station. The Local Station indicator flashes green when the transfer request is received, and displays solid green when accepted.

8. From the local control station, turn the switch to Local to accept the transfer request. 9. Perform the necessary slip and cut operations, then request that control be returned to the driller by turning the switch mounted on the local control panel to Driller’s Control. 10. Press Accept Control from the operator workstation touchscreen (shown above).

10-16 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 10-17 of 50

10

Drawworks

The indicator flashes green until the operator accepts the transfer. 11. Press Close. The drawworks mode resets to Normal. Press Mode Select again to display the drawworks Mode Select pop-up window (see page 10-13) to select another mode.

! Perform a full block calibration after each slip & cut operation. See section titled "Block and Elevator Position Calibration" on page 10-38.

Lowering and Hoisting Rate The Lowering and Hoisting gauge displays the block’s lowering or hoisting rate. The user-defined Maximum Hoist and Lower Speed markers indicate the current speed limit.

See section titled "Defining Maximum Block Speeds" on page 10-10.

The lowering and hoisting gauge displays only on the Drawworks Tripping screen.

10-17 www.nov.com

10

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 10-18 of 50

Drawworks

Autodrill Mode Autodrill mode launches (and allows operation of the drawworks through) the Electronic Driller System™ (EDS) application.

! The driller is responsible for ensuring that the crownmounted compensator (CMC) is locked, and the position status reflects little or no ocean heave prior to activating Autodrill Mode. Excessive heave could cause damage to equipment and rig down time. Extreme care should be taken when using Autodrill mode. See Chapter 8, titled "Crown-Mounted Compensator (CMC)” for more information.

Activating the Electronic Driller System 1. At the Drawworks Drilling screen, press the Autodrill toggle button to turn EDS on while the parking brake is engaged. See section titled "Parking Brake Controls" on page 10-5. The Autodrill status reading (located above the button) changes from Off to Ready. 2. Manually release the parking brake. Once torque transfer completes, EDS begins running, and the Autodrill status changes to Running.

During manual drilling operations, the rate of penetration (ROP) value is zero. If Autodrill is active, but there is no movement, ensure that the ROP setpoint value is acceptable, and the user-defined number of lines strung is correct. See section titled "Defining Parameter Setpoint Values" on page 10-19, and section titled "Block and Elevator Position Calibration" on page 10-38.

10-18 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 10-19 of 50

10

Drawworks

Activating or Deactivating Autodrill Parameters Press the colored WOB (weight on bit), Torque, or Delta P (pressure) buttons to activate or deactivate a parameter. A blue highlight behind the button indicates it is active.

ROP is active by default when Autodrill mode is turned on.

Digital readings display above each parameter’s vertical graph. Black markers on the graphs mark the user-defined setpoint values.

Activate or Deactivate

Defining Parameter Setpoint Values The system attempts to achieve as many of the user-defined setpoints as possible for activated parameters. For example, if WOB and ROP are both active, and the system reaches the ROP setpoint first, the system attempts to reach the WOB setpoint also. If the system reaches the WOB setpoint first, attempts to reach the ROP setpoint continue. If drilling operation speeds increase and WOB decreases (for instance, when encountering a softer formation), the system again attempts to reach the ROP setpoint value. Activate the parameter (see section titled "Activating or Deactivating Autodrill Parameters” above), then press its Setpoint button to display its keypad pop-up window.

10-19 www.nov.com

10

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 10-20 of 50

Drawworks

Activate or Deactivate Variable Adjust

Current Setpoint Value

Define Setpoint

Define the setpoint value, then press Set to confirm the value and return to the Drilling screen.

If Autodrill mode is on, but there is no movement, ensure that the ROP setpoint value is acceptable, and the userdefined number of lines strung is correct. See section titled "Block and Elevator Position Calibration" on page 10-38.

10-20 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 10-21 of 50

10

Drawworks

Variable Adjustment The real-time drilling trend display (see section titled "Drilling Trends” below) is driven by digital signals received at certain intervals. Dampening (also referred to as “time-constant adjustment”) can improve the readability of the weight on bit (WOB) and delta pressure displays by limiting the frequency of the display update. Press the (WOB or Delta P) Variable Adjust button to display its pop-up window.

Variable Adjust

Press the down or up arrow buttons to decrease or increase the value. Press the left (Faster) or right (Slower) arrow buttons to adjust the signal refresh interval. Press Close to return to the Drawworks Drilling screen.

You can also zero the or adjust the parameter value at this screen by pressing Zero WOB or Zero Delta P.

10-21 www.nov.com

10

Drawworks

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 10-22 of 50

Drilling Trends Press Drilling Trends to display a real-time graph that charts the data for activated drilling parameters. The colors on the graph correspond to the active parameters on the Drawworks Drilling screen.

Press Gain Adjust to display the Gain Adjust pop-up window.

Drag the slider, or use the blue Lower or Higher buttons to adjust the appropriate variable’s gain factor. Press Close Trend to close the Drilling Parameter Trends window.

10-22 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 10-23 of 50

10

Drawworks

Auto Reaming Setup

! The driller is responsible for ensuring that the crownmounted compensator (CMC) is locked, and the position status reflects little or no ocean heave prior to using Auto Reaming. Excessive heave could cause damage to equipment and rig down time. Extreme care should be taken when using Auto Reaming mode. See Chapter 8, titled "Crown-Mounted Compensator (CMC)” for more information.

At the Drawworks Drilling screen, press the Reaming button to display the Auto Reaming setup screen.

R

Enable: Press the Enable button to enable and disable the reaming feature. The text display changes to reflect the status.

R

Pull Limit: Press the Pull Limit button to display the keypad. Define a maximum pull weight value, then press Set to close the keypad. The system reduces pull speed as the real load weight approaches this setpoint value.

R

Hoist and Lower Speed: Press the Hoist or Lower Speed button to display the keypad. Define a maximum speed value (in feet per hour), then press Set to close the keypad.

R

Distance: Press the Distance button to display the keypad. Define the distance between the block and the drill stop setpoint during reaming operations, then press Set to close the keypad. Once the block hoists this distance, it lowers at the userdefined Lower Speed setpoint value.

Press Help to display the Help screen.

10-23 www.nov.com

10

Drawworks

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 10-24 of 50

Press Close to return to the Drawworks Drilling screen.

10-24 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 10-25 of 50

Drawworks

10

Drawworks Menu From any Drawworks screen, press the Drawworks button located on the main menu bar to display its tool menu.

See section titled "Utility Menu" on page 2-13.

See section titled "Common Diagnostics Menu" on page 2-19.

See Chapter 3, titled "Alarms and Events.”

See section titled "Calibration Menu" on page 10-38.

See section titled "Status Menu" on page 10-31.

See section titled "Tool Diagnostics Menu" on page 10-28.

See section titled "Motor Controls Menu" on page 10-26.

See section titled "Tripping and Drilling" on page 10-1.

10-25 www.nov.com

10

Drawworks

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 10-26 of 50

Motor Controls Menu Press Drawworks --> Motor Controls to display the Motor Controls menu.

Auxiliary Control Press Drawworks --> Motor Controls --> Auxiliary Control to display the Auxiliary Control screen.

Press the appropriate Stop or Start button to enable or disable a blower or lube pump motor. Motor Running lights display green to indicate that the motor is running. Air Pressure lights display red to indicate a fault or alarm condition; black to indicate a normal state.

10-26 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 10-27 of 50

10

Drawworks

Assignments Press Drawworks --> Motor Control --> Assignments to display the Drawworks/Top Drive Assignments screen.

This screen provides a way for the operator to assign VFD motors to the drawworks and the top drive. It also displays the current status of all VFDs. See Chapter 4, titled "Assignments” for more information.

10-27 www.nov.com

10

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 10-28 of 50

Drawworks

Tool Diagnostics Menu Press Drawworks --> Tool Diagnostic to display the Drawworks Tool Diagnostic menu. .

Drum Encoders Press Drawworks --> Tool Diagnostic --> Drum Encoders to display the Drum Encoders screen.

Three sensors are used calculate the block position.

Status Displays R

Status: Displays either Enabled or Disabled to indicate the encoder status.

R

Count: Displays the current count value for each encoder.

R

Sensor Failure: Displays red to indicate a sensor failure.

Enable or Disable an Encoder Press the appropriate Enable/Disable toggle button to enable or disable an encoder.

! For safety reasons, NOV recommends that all three encoders are enabled at all times.

10-28 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 10-29 of 50

Drawworks

10

Hook Load Sensors Press Drawworks --> Tool Diagnostic --> Hook Load Sensors to display the Hook Load Diagnostic screen.

Status Displays R

Status: Displays either Enabled or Disabled to indicate the encoder status.

R

Hook Load: Displays weight on the drill string according to each sensor.

Inconsistencies between hook load readings could indicate a sensor failure.

R

Sensor Failure: Displays red to indicate a sensor failure.

Enable or Disable a Sensor Press the appropriate Enable Sensor toggle button to enable or disable a sensor.

! For safety reasons, National Oilwell Varco recommends that all three sensors be enabled at all times.

10-29 www.nov.com

10

Drawworks

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 10-30 of 50

Compensator Sensors Press Drawworks --> Tool Diagnostic --> Compensator Sensors to display the Compensator Sensors screen.

Status Displays R

Value: Displays each sensor’s current value.

R

Communication Failed: A red display indicates a communication error or fault state; black indicates a normal or idle state.

R

Sensor Mismatch: A red display indicates a communication error or fault state; black indicates a normal or idle state.

R

Single Sensor Operation: A red display indicates a communication error or fault state; black indicates a normal or idle state.

Enable or Disable a Sensor Press the appropriate Enable Sensor toggle button to enable or disable a sensor. A green background indicates that the sensor is enabled.

10-30 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 10-31 of 50

10

Drawworks

Status Menu Press Drawworks --> Status to display the Drawworks Status menu. .

Drawworks Status Press Drawworks --> Status --> Drawworks Status to display the Drawworks Status screen.

Alarm and Fault Status Indicators Hook load sensor, drum encoder, motor, VFD, brake, temperature, flow, level, and pressure status indicators display red to indicate an alarm state, or amber to indicate a pre-alarm condition that requires monitoring; green indicates a “running” state (motors); grey indicates a normal or idle state.

See the NOV model-specific drawworks “Alarm & Fault Response Specification” document for detailed drawworks alarm information. Also see section titled "Alarm Definitions" on page 10-49, and Chapter 3, titled "Alarms and Events.”

10-31 www.nov.com

10

Drawworks

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 10-32 of 50

Alarms Reset Press Alarms Reset to reset alarm displays after appropriate action has been taken to clear the condition.

Motor Displays R

A green Blower Running display indicates that the blower is running normally; black indicates a normal or idle state; red indicates a fault or alarm condition.

R

A red Diff Pressure Low display indicates that the difference between the suction and the exhaust of the blower is too low, and the motor is not receiving proper air flow.

R

The motor Speed reading displays the current speed (rpm) value.

R

The motor Torque reading displays the current torque value.

R

A green VFD Status display indicates that the VFD is running; black indicates an idle or normal state; red indicates a fault or alarm condition.

Parking Brake Displays Service Brake pressure graphs located on either side of the screen contain digital readings and a blue bar that rises and falls to mark the current pressure values. Red Park Apply Fail, Park Release Fail, Servo Fail, or Bypass Fail displays indicate an alarm state. Red temperature, flow, or pressure displays indicate an alarm state.

10-32 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 10-33 of 50

10

Drawworks

Brake Capacity Test Use the brake capacity test to verify that the friction brake has the torque capacity to hold the rated load by applying torque from the motor against the friction brake. Each brake section is checked separately to ensure they have the specified torque capacity.

! The system must be parked with minimal hook load (empty traveling assembly) prior to beginning this test.

At the Drawworks Status screen, press Capacity Test to display the Brake Capacity Test popup window.

Press Yes! Start Brake Capacity Test. The system begins applying torque to the motors with a very small speed command, attempting to detect drum movement.

10-33 www.nov.com

10

Drawworks

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 10-34 of 50

Green Pass displays indicate that the brake passed the test; red Fail displays indicate that the brake failed the test. Brake load capacity readings display beneath the Pass/Fail displays. Press Close to return to the Drawworks Status screen.

Brake Valve Test The Valve Test tests the valves that control the brakes. Press Valve Test to display the Brake Valve Test pop-up window.

Press Yes! Start Brake Valve Test to begin. A progress window displays until the test is complete.

Press Close when the test is complete.

10-34 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 10-35 of 50

10

Drawworks

Brake Wear Measurement Test Verify that the friction brake is placed in the correct state (all pressure removed from the brake) when selected for wear measurement. Each brake is checked separately while the other brake is fully applied (0 psi in spring-applied, and 120 psi in the air-applied section. Press Measurement. to display the Brake Measurement Assist pop-up window.

This button is only active when the driller has ownership of the drawworks and the drawworks is parked.

Press Measure Brake 1 or Measure Brake 2 to put that Brake into the proper state for measurement. Brake 1 is the one on the left if facing the drum. In order to test the other brake or to close the dialog, press the Reset button. Press Reset to select Measure Brake 2 or to close.

Pressing Reset places the brake back into the parked condition (zero pressure on spring-applied; 120 psi on airapplied).

10-35 www.nov.com

10

Drawworks

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 10-36 of 50

Drum and Block Status Information Digital readings display: R

Oil Temperature

R

Oil Pressure

R

Elevator Position

R

Drum Setpoint

R

Drum Speed

R

Park Status

Motor/VFD Status Press Drawworks --> Status --> Motor/VFD Status to display the Motor/VFD Status Detail screen.

This screen contains current chopper motor status (health and air flow) and drawworks VFD status (speed, torque, and winding temperature readings). Status indicators display the following information:

Health

Displays green to indicate that the chopper is online and operating normally; red to indicate a fault or alarm state; black to indicate that the chopper is offline.

DBR Air Flow

Displays green to indicate that the drawworks brake resistor air flow fan is on and operating normally; black to indicate it is off.

Ready

Displays green to indicate that the VFD is ready.

Assigned

Displays green to indicate that the VFD is assigned.

10-36 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 10-37 of 50

10

Drawworks

Fault

Displays red to indicate that a fault is detected with the VFD.

Running

Displays green to indicate that the VFD is running.

Press the VFD Fault Reset button to reset the VFDs after the appropriate action has been taken to clear faults.

See the NOV model-specific drawworks “Alarm & Fault Response Specification” document for detailed drawworks alarm information. Also see section titled "Alarm Definitions" on page 10-49, and Chapter 3, titled "Alarms and Events.”

10-37 www.nov.com

10

Drawworks

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 10-38 of 50

Calibration Menu Press Drawworks --> Calibration to display the Drawworks Calibration menu.

Block and Elevator Position Calibration Press Drawworks --> Calibration --> Block Calibration to display the first Block Height Calibration screen.

1. Ensure that the system is parked, then press Full Calibration to begin.

Once full block calibration begins, the block normally travels at 25% its normal speed. The last calibration value will also be erased.

2. Press Yes to confirm that you wish to continue. 3. Press the Lines Strung button to display the Lines Strung Select pop-up window.

10-38 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 10-39 of 50

Drawworks

10

4. Press to select the correct number of lines strung, then press Close. 5. Press Continue to display the next Block Height Calibration screen.

6. Move the drum to a transition between layers, then press the button that corresponds to that layer transition (1st, 2nd, or 3rd).

10-39 www.nov.com

10

Drawworks

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 10-40 of 50

7. Press Continue to display the next Block Height Calibration screen.

8. Lower the block until the elevator rests on the slips, rotary table, or at a known height position, then press the Set Elevator Position button to display its keypad. 9. Enter the correct elevator height value, then press Set to close the keypad. 10. Verify the value, then press Set Elevator Position and Continue.

10-40 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 10-41 of 50

Drawworks

10

11. Press either Calculate Length of Assembly Automatically, or Enter Length of Assembly Manually.

! Select the manual method only if the system cannot automatically calculate the length of the assembly due to unavailable targets (for example, if the top drive is parked in the side skid), or due to proximity switch failure.

Q

If you selected Calculate Length of Assembly Automatically, the screen shown below appears; Move the block past the proximity sensors to continue calibration.

Q

If you selected Enter Length of Assembly Manually, skip to step 13.

12. If you selected Calculate Length of Assembly Automatically, block calibration is complete. Press Finish, then skip the remaining steps of this procedure.

! The block travel speed is no longer reduced to 25%; it now moves at 100%.

10-41 www.nov.com

10

Drawworks

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 10-42 of 50

13. If you selected Enter Length of Assembly Manually, the following screen appears. Follow the remaining steps of this procedure.

14. Manually measure the length of the traveling assembly (from the top of the block, to the bottom of the elevator). 15. Press the measurement button, then enter the value using the keypad. 16. Press Set to close the keypad.

17. Press Continue.

10-42 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 10-43 of 50

Drawworks

10

18. Press Finish. Block calibration is complete

! The block travel speed is no longer reduced to 25%; it now moves at 100%.

The first Block Height Calibration screen displays (partial screen shown here).

10-43 www.nov.com

10

Drawworks

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 10-44 of 50

19. Press Elevator Position Calibration to display the Elevator Position Reset screen.

20. Move the elevator to a known position (such as the drill floor at 0.0 feet), then press the New Elevator Position button to display the keypad.

21. Define the position, then press Set to confirm the value and close the keypad. The following screen appears.

10-44 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 10-45 of 50

Drawworks

10

22. Press Set Elevator Position to store the value, then press Close. Elevator position calibration is complete.

10-45 www.nov.com

10

Drawworks

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 10-46 of 50

Hook Load Tare Press Drawworks --> Calibration --> Hook Load Tare to display the Hook Load Tare Calibration screen. .

1. Press the Tare Weight button to display its keypad. 2. Define the tare weight, then press Set to confirm the value and close the keypad. 3. Verify that the new value displayed is correct, then press Save.

Press Reset to reset the tare weight value.

10-46 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 10-47 of 50

10

Drawworks

Standpipe Calibration

! Turn mud pumps off before performing his procedure.

Press Drawworks --> Calibration --> Standpipe Tare to display the Standpipe Sensor Selection and Tare screen.

Press Use Sensor (1 or 2) to select a sensor, then press Zero Standpipe Pressure to zero the reading.

10-47 www.nov.com

10

Drawworks

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 10-48 of 50

CMC Calibration Press Drawworks --> Calibration --> CMC Calibration to display the Compensator Position Calibration screen.

1. Press Enable Sensor (1 or 2) to enable the sensor. A green background indicates that the sensor is enabled. 2. Press Set (Max or Min) Stroke to display its keypad. 3. Define the stroke value, then press Set to confirm and close the keypad. The raw and calibrated values display in the sensor box. The Calibrated light displays green to indicate the sensor was calibrated properly; black to indicate it has not been calibrated. Status displays near the bottom of the screen display red to indicate a communication or fault state; black indicates a normal or idle state.

See Chapter 8, titled "Crown-Mounted Compensator (CMC)” for more information about the CMC interface.

10-48 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 10-49 of 50

10

Drawworks

Alarms

See the NOV model-specific drawworks “Alarm & Fault Response Specification” document for detailed drawworks alarm information. Also see Chapter 3, titled "Alarms and Events.”

Alarm Definitions Trip Action taken by the control system in response to an abnormal condition.

Abnormal Condition R

The measurement of a process variable that is outside the normal operating conditions. This value is determined by, or based upon, the recommendations of the equipment manufacturer.

R

Loss of communication with the variable frequency drive (VFD).

R

Loss of communication with remote I/O of the drawworks control system.

R

Loss of utilities (air supply, cooling water, electrical).

R

Failure of an instrument connected to the control system.

Fault R

Instrument failure or process condition that makes the signal to the control system greater than 20.2 ma, or less than 3.8 ma.

R

A condition in which two components on the a same circuit are not in the same state (for example, a switch and relay not in the same state where monitored).

Alarm A text message displayed on the alarm banner and the Alarms screen until cleared. Abnormal conditions, faults, soft trips, and all category stops generate an alarm.

Soft Trip A condition where continued operation may cause damage to the drawworks or its associated systems. The trip bit is set, and an alarm triggers, notifying the driller of the condition. When the driller moves the joystick below the +/- 25% position, commands above 25% are limited to 25% of the driller-defined maximum. Once the system is parked, it remains parked until the fault is cleared or acknowledged.

10-49 www.nov.com

10

Drawworks

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 10-50 of 50

Category 2 Stops R

The first type of category 2 stop is a controlled stop with power remaining available to the VFDs/motors. Joystick commands are disabled. After drum speed is reduced to zero rpm, the spring brakes are set. Once they are engaged and the load is secured, the speed and torque commands to the VFDs are zeroed. If the system cannot be decelerated by the motors, the friction brakes stop the drum before the solenoid valves de-energize, and the system initiates a Category 2 - Brake Only stop (described below).

R

The second type is referred to as a Brake Only stop, which is a controlled stop that reduces joystick movement commands to zero. VFDs shut down, and the friction brake speed controller decelerates the system to zero rpm. After drum speed reaches zero rpm, power to the brake system’s solenoid valves is removed, which sets the spring-applied brakes.

R

The third type is referred to as a Category 2 Stop Open Loop stop, which initiates the same sequence of events as the Brake Only stop, except the friction brake is applied to achieve a calculated deceleration rate, without speed control. This stop is initiated when an encoder fault is detected, and the system cannot determine which encoder is valid.

E-Stop (Category 0) Category 0 emergency stops immediately remove power to the VFDs and motors (uncontrolled stop; VFDs trip and coast to a stop), removes pressure from the spring-applied brakes, and applies full pressure to air-applied service brakes. This stop can be initiated either automatically by the control system, or by manually pushing the E-Stop button located on the driller workstation control panel. If a system has two chairs, the E-Stop button on the chair that has ownership of the drawworks initiates a Category 0 E-Stop. The E-Stop on the other chair will initiate a Category 2 E-Stop. Normally, that would mean that the E-Stop button on the driller’s chair will initiate a Category 0 EStop and the one of the AD chair will cause a Category 2 E-Stop. However, if the AD has ownership of the drawworks, then the AD chair’s E-Stop button will cause the Category 0 E-Stop and the driller’s chair E-Stop button will cause the Categoy 0 E-Stop.

The chair that is permitted to control the drawworks is selected by a keyswitch located in the LER. If the key switch is selected to Driller then the drillers chair has the Category 0 E-Stop and the AD has the Category 2 EStop. If the keyswitch is selected to AD then the AD has the Category 0 E-Stop and the Driller has the Category 2 E-Stop. The draw works ownership button will not be available to the chair that is not selected as the Category 0 E-stop.

10-50 www.nov.com

FINAL DOCUMENTATION Amphion Operator’s Guide

Section 1.11 Driller Auxiliaries

www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 11-1 of 4

Driller Auxiliaries

This chapter contains examples of Amphion operator interface screens and controls, and may or may not represent your particular rig configuration.

Operator Screen Press Tools --> Driller Auxiliaries to display the first Driller Auxiliaries screen.

Press the appropriate Stop or Start button to stop or start a motor. Press Next Page to display the second Driller Auxiliaries screen.

11-1 www.nov.com

11

Driller Auxiliaries

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 11-2 of 4

Press the appropriate Stop or Start button to stop or start a motor. Press Previous Page to display the first Driller Auxiliaries screen.

11-2 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 11-3 of 4

Driller Auxiliaries

11

Driller Auxiliaries Menu Press the Driller Auxiliaries button, located on the main menu bar, to display the Driller Auxiliaries menu.

See section titled "Utility Menu" on page 2-13.

See section titled "Common Diagnostics Menu" on page 2-19.

See Chapter 3, titled "Alarms and Events.”

See section titled "Operator Screen" on page 11-1.

See section titled "Mud Treatment Status" on page 11-4.

11-3 www.nov.com

11

Driller Auxiliaries

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 11-4 of 4

Mud Treatment Status Press Driller Auxiliaries --> Status to display the Mud Treatment Status screen.

Green indicators reflect all mud treatment tools currently running; grey indicators reflect an idle state; red indicators reflect a fault state or communication error.

11-4 www.nov.com

FINAL DOCUMENTATION Amphion Operator’s Guide

Section 1.12 Fingerboard

www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 12-1 of 4

Fingerboard

This chapter contains examples of Amphion operator interface screens and controls, and may or may not represent your particular rig configuration.

Operator Screen Press Tools --> Fingerboard to display the Fingerboard operator screen.

While latches are closed, pipes in the fingerboard display as solid black circles, and contain a white number assignment. A black number inside a white circle signifies an empty pipe slot.

Empty slots

12-1 www.nov.com

12

Fingerboard

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 12-2 of 4

Information on the Fingerboard screens are display-only. See Chapter 20, titled "Racker (Bridge Racker)” and Chapter 21, titled "Racker (Pipe Racking System PRS)” for more information about the fingerboard and available controls.

Press one of the sections to “zoom in” on a work area.

Press anywhere outside of the work area to display the main Fingerboard screen.

12-2 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 12-3 of 4

Fingerboard

12

Fingerboard Tool Menu Press the Fingerboard button to display its tool menu.

See section titled "Utility Menu" on page 2-13.

See section titled "Common Diagnostics Menu" on page 2-19.

See Chapter 3, titled "Alarms and Events.”

See section titled "Fingerboard Setup" on page 12-4.”

See section titled "Operator Screen" on page 12-1.

12-3 www.nov.com

12

Fingerboard

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 12-4 of 4

Fingerboard Setup Press Fingerboard --> Setup to display the Fingerboard Setup menu.

Press Adjustable Fingerboard to display the Adjustable Fingerboard Setup screen.

Follow the onscreen instructions to define the finger values, then press Accept Positions.

12-4 www.nov.com

FINAL DOCUMENTATION Amphion Operator’s Guide

Section 1.13 Foxhole

www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 13-1 of 4

Foxhole

This chapter contains general information about the Amphion interface and controls, and may or may not represent your particular rig configuration.

Operator Screen Press Tools --> Foxhole to display the Foxhole operator screen.

Tool Ownership Assume tool ownership of the foxhole to enable controls. See section titled "Tool Ownership" on page 2-34.

13-1 www.nov.com

13

Foxhole

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 13-2 of 4

Status Displays The right side of the screen contains status and alarm displays. R

Foxhole: Displays the current state of the foxhole (open or closed)

R

Foxhole Open: Displays green to indicate that the foxhole is open; grey to indicate it is not.

R

Foxhole Closed: Displays green to indicated that the foxhole is closed; grey to indicate that it is not.

R

Maintenance Mode: Displays yellow to indicate that maintenance mode is engaged; grey to indicate that it is not. See section titled "Maintenance Mode" on page 2-11.

R

PRS Comms Lost: Displays red to indicate a communication fault with the pipe racking system; grey to indicate that communication is normal.

Operator messages display along the bottom of the screen.

Foxhole Controls Press Controls - Open or Close buttons to open or close the foxhole.

A green backlight marks the current selection.

The racker must be positioned directly above the foxhole, and its gripping element must be closed before the foxhole can be opened. (See section titled "Override Controls" on page 13-3.) Also see Chapter 20, titled "Racker (Bridge Racker),” and Chapter 21, titled "Racker (Pipe Racking System PRS).”

13-2 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 13-3 of 4

Foxhole

13

Override Controls If the racker is not positioned directly above the foxhole, you can use the Override controls to open the foxhole.

The override controls allow the operator to open or close the foxhole without regard to normal safety interlocks; particularly, the position of the racker and its gripping element position. Use override mode with caution. Significant risk of equipment damage and danger to personnel exists when the override is engaged. Failure to observe and follow proper safe working procedures could result in serious or fatal injury to personnel, significant equipment damage, and extended rig down time.

Press and hold the Interlock - Override button to override normal operating requirements for the foxhole.

A green backlight indicates that the override is engaged.

! For safety reasons, this function must be activated from another touchscreen.

13-3 www.nov.com

13

Foxhole

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 13-4 of 4

Foxhole Tool Menu Press the Foxhole main menu button to display its tool menu.

See section titled "Utility Menu" on page 2-13.

See section titled "Common Diagnostics Menu" on page 2-19.

See Chapter 3, titled "Alarms and Events.”

See section titled "Operator Screen" on page 13-1.

See section titled "Maintenance Mode" on page 2-11.

13-4 www.nov.com

FINAL DOCUMENTATION Amphion Operator’s Guide

Section 1.14 Hydraulic Power Unit (HPU)

www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 14-1 of 4

Hydraulic Power Unit (HPU)

This chapter contains examples of Amphion operator interface screens and controls, and may or may not represent your particular rig configuration.

Operator Screen Press Tools --> HPU to display the Hydraulic Power Unit screen.

14-1 www.nov.com

14

Hydraulic Power Unit (HPU)

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 14-2 of 4

Status Displays Motor Status Displays along the top of the screen indicate the status of each HPU motor.

R

Available: Indicates that the motor is available, but not running.

R

Running: Indicates that the motor is currently running.

R

Off: Indicates that the motor is unavailable.

Control Location Displays along the right side of the screen indicate each motor’s current control location.

Green displays indicate the assigned location; all grey displays indicate that the control location is either unassigned or unavailable. R

Motor Auto: Indicates that only the driller or assistant driller can control the HPU using the Amphion interface. See section titled "HPU Controls" on page 14-3.

R

Motor Local: Indicates that the HPU motor can only be controlled from the HPU itself.

R

Motor Remote: Indicates that a previously set up remote station (not located at tool itself) can control the HPU motors. While the driller or assistant driller can still control the motors in this state, they can still be turned on or off at this remote station.

Use the control location switch (normally mounted on the HPU) to assign control of the HPU to one of three locations.

Messages Operator messages display along the bottom of the screen.

14-2 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 14-3 of 4

Hydraulic Power Unit (HPU)

14

HPU Controls Motor controls are enabled on this screen only if the motor status is Available (see section titled "Motor Status" on page 14-2), and the current control location status is set to Auto or Remote (see section titled "Control Location" on page 14-2). Press the appropriate motor’s Stop or Start button to stop or start a motor.

A red or green backlight indicates the current selection. The motor status also displays along the top of the screen (available, running, or off).

14-3 www.nov.com

14

Hydraulic Power Unit (HPU)

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 14-4 of 4

HPU Menu Press the HPU button to display its tool menu.

See section titled "Utility Menu" on page 2-13.

See section titled "Common Diagnostics Menu" on page 2-19.

See Chapter 3, titled "Alarms and Events.”

See section titled "Maintenance Mode" on page 2-11.

See section titled "Operator Screen" on page 14-1.

14-4 www.nov.com

FINAL DOCUMENTATION Amphion Operator’s Guide

Section 1.15 Mud Bucket

www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 15-5 of 8

Mud Bucket

This chapter contains examples of Amphion operator interface screens and controls, and may or may not represent your particular rig configuration.

Operator Screen Press Tools --> Mud Bucket to display the Mud Bucket operator screen.

Tool Ownership Assume tool ownership of the mud bucket to enable controls. See section titled "Tool Ownership" on page 2-34.

15-5 www.nov.com

15

Mud Bucket

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 15-6 of 8

Status Displays A green Stowed display indicates that the mud bucket is in a stowed position. A yellow Maintenance Mode display indicates maintenance mode is engaged. See section titled "Maintenance Mode" on page 2-11 for more information.

Operator messages display along the bottom of the screen.

Mud Bucket Controls Arm Movement Press Extend or Retract to control arm movement.

Jaw Press Open or Close to control jaw movement.

15-6 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 15-7 of 8

Mud Bucket

15

Mud Bucket Tool Menu Press the Mud Bucket main menu button to display its tool menu.

See section titled "Utility Menu" on page 2-13.

See section titled "Common Diagnostics Menu" on page 2-19.

See Chapter 3, titled "Alarms and Events.”

See section titled "Operator Screen" on page 15-5.

See section titled "Maintenance Mode" on page 2-11.

15-7 www.nov.com

15

Mud Bucket

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 15-8 of 8

15-8 www.nov.com

FINAL DOCUMENTATION Amphion Operator’s Guide

Section 1.16 Mud Pumps

www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 16-1 of 10

Mud Pumps Operator Screen Press Tools --> Mud Pumps to display the Mud Pumps operator screen.

Tool Ownership Assume ownership of the mud pumps to enable controls. See section titled "Tool Ownership" on page 2-34.

16-1 www.nov.com

16

Mud Pumps

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 16-2 of 10

Mud Pump Status Displays Status indicators display to the right of each mud pump’s SPM (strokes per minute) graph.

R

Auxiliaries OK: Displays grey to indicate an idle state; green to indicate that auxiliaries are running properly; red to indicate a fault state.

R

Drive OK: Displays green to indicate that the drive is running properly; grey to indicate an idle state; red to indicate a fault state.

R

Power Limit: Displays red when the system is limiting the power, and its speed command is being dynamically reduced; yellow when the power limit speed reduction is released, and the tool is ramping back up to its last speed command; green when power is not limited, and the tool is operating at its current speed command. See Chapter 19, titled "Power System.”

Strokes Per Minute (SPM) Displays The Mud Pump operator screen contains an SPM graph for each mud pump.

A digital SPM reading displays at the top of the graph, and a blue bar rises and falls on the vertical graph to mark the current reading.

16-2 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 16-3 of 10

Mud Pumps

16

Defining Maximum SPM Values SPM setpoint controls are located to the right of each mud pump’s SPM (strokes per minute) graph. Press the appropriate mud pump’s (SPM) Set button to display its keypad.

Define a maximum SPM value, then press Set to confirm the value and close the keypad. Use the blue arrow up or down buttons to incrementally increase or decrease this value. The current user-defined SPM Setpoint value displays on the control button.

Standpipe Pressure Display A vertical Standpipe pressure graph displays in the top right portion of the Mud Pumps operator screen.

A blue bar rises and falls to mark the current reading, and a digital reading displays at the top of the graph.

16-3 www.nov.com

16

Mud Pumps

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 16-4 of 10

Defining the Pressure Limit Value Standpipe pressure limit controls are located beneath the Standpipe pressure graph. Press the Pressure Limit - Set button to display its keypad.

Define a maximum pressure limit value, then press Set to confirm the value and close the keypad. The current user-defined Pressure Limit value displays on the control button.

Starting and Pausing Mud Pump Motors Mud pump motor controls are located beneath each mud pump’s SPM (strokes per minute) graph and setpoint controls.

R

Press the Controls - On button to start a pump motor.

R

Press the Controls - Pause button to slowly stop and pause a pump motor.

R

Press the Controls - Pause button again to return a mud pump to its previously operating SPM.

16-4 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 16-5 of 10

Mud Pumps

16

Stop All Mud Pumps The Stop All MPs button is located in the lower right corner of the Mud Pumps operator screen. Press Stop All MPs to slowly reduce the SPM value to zero and place all mud pumps in Pause mode.

Press the Controls - Pause button again to return a mud pump to its previously operating SPM. (See section titled "Starting and Pausing Mud Pump Motors" on page 16-4.)

Operator Messages and Miscellaneous Controls By default, operator messages display along the bottom of the Mud Pumps operator screen.

Press Misc Controls to display MP (1, 2, and 3) Aux Override and Fault Reset controls along the bottom of the Mud Pump operator screen.

Safety interlocks prevent certain auxiliary operations from engaging where applicable. If an operation must be performed without interlocks, press and hold the MP (1, 2, or 3) Aux - Override button while issuing commands. (See section titled "Auxiliary Controls" on page 16-8.) Press the Fault - Reset button to reset fault displays after appropriate action has been taken to clear the condition. Press Messages to display operator messages again.

16-5 www.nov.com

16

Mud Pumps

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 16-6 of 10

Mud Pump Tool Menu Press the Mud Pump button to display its tool menu.

See section titled "Utility Menu" on page 2-13.

See section titled "Common Diagnostics Menu" on page 2-19.

See Chapter 3, titled "Alarms and Events.”

See section titled "Operator Screen" on page 16-1.

See section titled "Auxiliary Controls" on page 16-8.

See section titled "Mud Pump Status" on page 16-7.

16-6 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 16-7 of 10

Mud Pumps

16

Mud Pump Status Press Mud Pumps --> Mud Pump Status to display the default Mud Pump #1 Status screen.

All information on the Mud Pump Status screen is display-only. Digital speed (command and actual), SPM, torque (limit and actual), and temperature (winding and bearing) readings display in the center portion of the screen. (See section titled "Defining Maximum SPM Values" on page 163.) Status and fault indicators display along the left and top/center portions of the screen: R

Drive Monitor - Communication: Displays red to indicate a drive communication fault; green when communication is active; grey to indicate an idle state.

R

Drive Monitor - Ready: Displays green to indicate that the drive is ready; grey to indicate an idle state.

R

Drive Monitor - Assigned: Displays green to indicate that the drive is assigned; grey to indicate it is unassigned.

R

Drive Monitor - Fault: Displays red to indicate a fault state; grey to indicate a normal state.

R

(Liner Wash and Pre-Charge) Pump Running: Displays green to indicate that the pump is running; grey to indicate an idle state.

R

Blower Running: Displays green to indicate that the blower is running; grey to indicate an idle state.

R

Blower Pressure Switch: Displays red to indicate a pressure switch fault; grey to indicate a normal state.

Press Mud Pump (#2 or #3) to display the same status screen for another mud pump.

16-7 www.nov.com

16

Mud Pumps

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 16-8 of 10

Auxiliary Controls Press Mud Pumps --> Auxiliary Controls to display the default Mud Pump #1 Auxiliary Controls screen.

Assume ownership of the mud pumps to enable controls. See section titled "Tool Ownership" on page 16-1. Press Mud Pump (#2 or #3) to display the same screen for another mud pump.

Status and Fault Displays Status displays for the blowers, liner wash pump, lube pump, and charge pump display to the left of their respective Manual Controls. (See "Manual Motor Controls” in the section below.) R

Motor Running: Displays green to indicate that the motor is running; grey to indicate an idle state.

R

Air Pressure: Displays green to indicate that blower’s air pressure value is within an acceptable range; red to indicate that pressure has fallen below an acceptable level.

R

Water Pressure: Displays green to indicate that the liner wash or charge pump’s water pressure value is within an acceptable range; red to indicate that pressure has fallen below an acceptable level.

R

Oil Pressure: Displays green to indicate that the lube pump’s oil pressure value is within an acceptable range; red to indicate that pressure has fallen below an acceptable level.

16-8 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 16-9 of 10

Mud Pumps

16

Manual Motor Controls Manual Controls for the blowers, liner wash pump, lube pump, and charge pump are located to the right of their respective status displays. Press Manual Controls - Stop or Start to manually stop or start a pump or blower motor.

A red or green backlight indicates the current selection.

16-9 www.nov.com

16

Mud Pumps

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 16-10 of 10

16-10 www.nov.com

FINAL DOCUMENTATION Amphion Operator’s Guide

Section 1.17 Ownership Overview

www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 17-1 of 2

Ownership Overview

This chapter contains examples of Amphion operator interface screens and controls, and may or may not represent your particular rig configuration.

Operator Screen Press Tools --> Ownership Overview to display the Tool Ownership Overview screen.

A text box and status light indicate the current ownership state of each tool. R

A green status light indicates that one of the operators currently own the tool. The text box beneath displays the current owner.

R

A black status light indicates that the tool is available.

R

A red status light indicates that the tool is unavailable. The text box beneath provides additional information (for example, the text box displays E-Stop if the emergency stop is engaged).

See section titled "Tool Ownership" on page 2-34 for more information.

17-1 www.nov.com

17

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 17-2 of 2

Ownership Overview

Ownership Overview Tool Menu Press the Ownership Overview button to display its tool menu.

See section titled "Utility Menu" on page 2-13.

See section titled "Common Diagnostics Menu" on page 2-19.

See Chapter 3, titled "Alarms and Events.”

17-2 www.nov.com

FINAL DOCUMENTATION Amphion Operator’s Guide

Section 1.18 Power Slips

www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 18-1 of 6

Power Slips

This chapter contains examples of Amphion operator interface screens and controls, and may or may not represent your particular rig configuration.

Operator Screen Press Tools --> Power Slips to display the Power Slips operator screen.

Tool Ownership If the joystick does not offer power slip controls, then press the Ownership button located in the bottom right corner of the screen to assume ownership and enable controls. If the joystick has the ability to control both the power slips and the drawworks, the workstation’s left control panel will contain a button that must be pressed in order to enable the power slips and allow the operator to assume ownership.

18-1 www.nov.com

18

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 18-2 of 6

Power Slips

If this is the case, push the Slips Enable button, then assume ownership of the power slips to enable controls.

DRIL

L

TDS

LINK

OPE

N

TILT

FLO AT TDS

CLO SE

LINK

OPE N CLO

SE

TDS ELE VATO R RAC

KER

OFF /AUTO

JAW

CLO S

E

DRAW

OVE WORKS RRID E PAR KIN

G BR

AKE

DOLL

Y EN

ABLE SLIP

OPE N

S EN

ABLE

CLO SE

IBOP

SLIP

S EN

ABL

E

See section titled "Tool Ownership" on page 2-34.

Status Displays The top left portion of the Power Slips operator screen contains fault and status displays.

Slips Pressure Loss

A red display indicates that the pressure value has fallen below an acceptable level; grey indicates a normal state.

Slips Open or Slips Closed

Green displays indicate the current state of the slips.

Maint Mode

A yellow display indicates maintenance mode is engaged; grey indicates an idle state. See section titled "Maintenance Mode" on page 2-11.

RST Locked

A red display indicates the rotary support table is locked; grey indicates an idle state. See Chapter 22, titled "Rotary Table.”

Operator messages display along the bottom of the screen.

18-2 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 18-3 of 6

18

Power Slips

Power Slip Controls Press the Open or Close button on the screen to control the power slips.

Alternatively, either the operator workstation’s right joystick or left control panel offers power slip controls, depending on your particular rig configuration.

Open Slips

OFF /AUT O

ON

Close Slips

OPE N

TDS BR

OPE N

CLO S

E

OPE N

AKE TDS FLO AT

CLO SE

DRIL

POW ER S L

CLO SE

IPS

L

TILT

OPE N

CLO SE

TDS IBOP TDS

Dead man switch

LINK

TDS EL

OPE N

RAC KER X OVE /Y RRID E

OFF /AUT O

PAR K

ING

BRA

RAC K TRA E R OVE VEL RRID E

ON

POW EVA TOR

ER S

LIPS

CLO SE

RAC KE JAW R S

KE A OVE DS RRID E

Either use the buttons on the top right side of the joystick, or the Power Slips - Open or Close discrete switch to control the slips. See section titled "Workstation Control Panels" on page 2-4 for more information.

18-3 www.nov.com

18

Power Slips

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 18-4 of 6

Auto Greaser Controls and Displays Press the Manual Controls - Stop or Start buttons to enable or disable manual controls.

A red Grease Level display indicates that the grease has fallen below an acceptable level. A digital reading displays the number of cycles completed since the last greasing.

18-4 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 18-5 of 6

Power Slips

18

Power Slips Tool Menu Press the Power Slips main menu button to display its tool menu.

See section titled "Utility Menu" on page 2-13.

See section titled "Common Diagnostics Menu" on page 2-19.

See Chapter 3, titled "Alarms and Events.”

See section titled "Maintenance Mode" on page 2-11.

See section titled "Operator Screen" on page 18-1.

18-5 www.nov.com

18

Power Slips

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 18-6 of 6

18-6 www.nov.com

FINAL DOCUMENTATION Amphion Operator’s Guide

Section 1.19 Power System

www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 19-1 of 14

Power System

This chapter contains examples of Amphion operator interface screens and controls, and may or may not represent your particular rig configuration.

Overview The purpose of the Amphion power system is to monitor and analyze the status of the drilling power source, and report power capacity and power consumed values to each tool. From these values, each tool calculates a power available value: Power Available = Power Capacity – Power Consumed Programming code stored on each tool’s controller determines whether power available is sufficient for its purposes, or if the tool needs to go into power limit mode. For more information about power calculations: R

See section titled "Power Capacity Calculations" on page 19-10.

R

See section titled "Power Consumed Calculations" on page 19-12.

R

See section titled "Power Available Calculations" on page 19-13.

On smaller rigs, the Amphion power system may be the only power management system on the rig. In this case, it monitors the status of the generators or utility power directly. It also monitors the overall system load, in addition to the drilling load. On larger rigs, the Amphion power system may be integrated as a sub-component to a larger overall power management system (PMS). In this case, it is normally the rig’s power management system that sends power availability signals to the Amphion power system for drilling purposes only; the Amphion power system would not manage the overall system load. In either case, the primary objective of the Amphion power system is to deliver power availability information to all drilling tools in order to prevent a system overload and blackout.

19-1 www.nov.com

19

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 19-2 of 14

Power System

Operator Screen Press Tools --> Power System to display the Power System Overview (also referred to as the One-Line Status screen).

All information on this screen is display-only. Please note that this screen may not reflect your particular rig configuration.

Screen Symbols Green symbols indicate an on, running, or closed state; red symbols indicate an off, stopped, or open state; white symbols indicate an unknown status.

Chopper Remote I/O

Inverter (INV)

Circuit Breaker (CB)

Rectifier

Feeder Breaker (FB)

Silicon-Controlled Rectifier (SCR)* *not applicable on all rigs

19-2 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 19-3 of 14

Power System

19

Power System Menu Press the Power System button to display its tool menu.

See section titled "Utility Menu" on page 2-13.”

See section titled "Common Diagnostics Menu" on page 2-19.

See Chapter 3, titled "Alarms and Events.”

See section titled "Trends" on page 19-9.

See section titled "Motor Control Centers (MCCs)" on page 19-8.

See section titled "Drives" on page 19-4.

See section titled "Operator Screen" on page 19-2.

19-3 www.nov.com

19

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 19-4 of 14

Power System

Drives Press Drives to display the Drive Status menu.

Inverters Press Drives --> Inverters to display the Inverters Status screen.

All information on this screen is display-only. Please note that this screen may not reflect your particular rig configuration. Two vertical graphs display the selected drive’s current motor speed and torque values. A blue bar rises and falls to mark the current reading. A digital reading also displays at the bottom of both graphs. Status displays indicate the current state for each of the following: Ready

Green indicates the drive is ready; grey indicates an idle state.

Running

Green indicates the drive is running; grey indicates an idle state.

Fault

Red indicates a fault state; grey indicates a normal state.

19-4 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 19-5 of 14

Power System

Power Supply Fault

Red indicates a fault state; grey indicates a normal state.

Encoder Fault

Red indicates a fault state; grey indicates a normal state.

Disconnect Closed

Green indicates that the switch is closed; grey indicates that it is open.

Fuse Status

Green indicates that the fuses are operating normally; grey indicates an abnormal state.

Ethernet Comm Loss

Red indicates the a fault state; grey indicates a normal state.

Profibus Comm Loss

Red indicates the a fault state; grey indicates a normal state.

19

Press any of the Drive buttons located along the right side of the screen to display the same information about another drive.

Choppers Press Drives --> Choppers to display the Choppers Status screen.

All information on this screen is display-only. Please note that this screen may not reflect your particular rig configuration. Disconnect Closed

Green indicates that the switch is closed; grey indicates that it is open.

19-5 www.nov.com

19

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 19-6 of 14

Power System

Enable

Green indicates that the chopper is enabled; grey indicates it is not.

Fuses OK

Green indicates that the fuses are operating normally; grey indicates an abnormal state.

Brake Resistor Air Pressure

Green indicates that sufficient air pressure is present; grey indicates that the air pressure has fallen below an acceptable level.

Brake Resistor Over Temp

Red indicates that the temperature has exceeded an acceptable level; grey indicates a normal state.

General Fault

Red indicates a fault state; grey indicates a normal state.

Over Current

Red indicates the a fault state; grey indicates a normal state.

Power Supply Fault

Red indicates a fault state; grey indicates a normal state.

Ethernet Comm Loss

Red indicates the a communication fault; grey indicates a normal state.

Rectifiers Press Drives --> Rectifiers to display the Rectifiers Status screen.

19-6 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 19-7 of 14

Power System

19

All information on this screen is display-only. Please note that this screen may not reflect your particular rig configuration.

Circuit Breaker Closed

Green indicates that the circuit breaker is closed; grey indicates it is open.

Fuses OK

Green indicates that the fuses are operating normally; grey indicates an abnormal state.

MOV Fuse Blown

Green indicates a normal state; red indicates that one of the metal oxide varistor fuses were blown.

Over Temperature

Grey indicates a normal state; red indicates that the temperature has exceeded acceptable levels.

Disconnect Switch

Green indicates that the switch is closed; grey indicates that it is open.

Blower Running

Green indicates that the blower is running; grey indicates that it is not.

Power Supply Fault

Red indicates a fault state; grey indicates a normal state.

Ethernet Comm Loss

Grey indicates a normal state; red indicates a communication failure.

19-7 www.nov.com

19

Power System

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 19-8 of 14

Motor Control Centers (MCCs) Press Power System --> MCCs to display the MCC Status screen.

All information on this screen is display-only. Please note that this screen may not reflect your particular rig configuration. This screen provides MCC status information related to the following: R

Mud pump blowers, liner wash, lube oil, and charge pumps

R

Mud return desilter and degasser pumps

R

Drill floor cooling water, hydraulic power units HPUs

R

Trip tank and mixing pumps

R

Resistor bank blowers

R

Top drive lube and cooling pumps

R

Drawworks blowers, lube pumps, and brake cooling water

R

Cooling circulation pumps

R

Substructure exhaust fans

Green status displays indicate an active state; grey indicates an idle or normal state.

19-8 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 19-9 of 14

Power System

19

Trends Press Power System --> Trends to display the Power Trend screen.

All information on this screen is display-only. Please note that this screen may not reflect your particular rig configuration. This trend graph realtime online power capacity and consumed kW values. Online status displays in the top right corner indicate the following: R

1, 2, and 3: Green indicates the generator (1, 2, or 3) is online; grey indicates it is not.

R

Emg: Green indicates that the emergency generator is online; grey indicates it is offline.

R

Xfmr: Green indicates that the transformer is online; grey indicates it is not.

19-9 www.nov.com

19

Power System

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 19-10 of 14

Power Capacity Calculations

See NOV document titled “Amphion Tool Controller Service Manual” for more information about the Debug Monitor module.

The Amphion power system calculates a total system capacity. Then, depending on the bus configuration, it determines the capacity available to each individual tool.

AC Bus Generator Capacity When the Amphion power system is monitoring the status of generators (as is normally the case on smaller rigs), the system capacity is determined by multiplying the capacity of one generator by the number of generators online. (Capacity of 1 Generator) x (Number of Generators Online) = System Capacity The default value for each generator depends on your particular rig configuration. However, each generator’s maximum rated capacity values can be set using the Debug Monitor module’s generators..capacity.kw file.

AC Bus Transformer Capacity When the Amphion power system is monitoring power available at a transformer (as is normally the case on larger rigs), it will determine the system capacity in one of the following ways, depending on the signals that are received. When calculating power available or power consumed values (described later in this section) using a transformer, the Amphion power system maintains the transformer’s maximum rated capacity value in the Debug Monitor’s transformers..capacity.kva file. The transformers’ default values depend on your particular rig configuration. When kW and kVAR load signals are available for the transformer, the Amphion power system actively calculates a power factor based on the ratio of the kW and kVAR feedback values. The transformer’s capacity kW value is calculated by multiplying the kVA rating value by the power factor value. (kVA rating) x (power factor) = Capacity kW When the system has more than one transformer, the system capacity value equals the sum of all online transformers’ capacity kW values.

System Capacity When the rig’s PMS sends a power available signal, the Amphion power system does not have the data necessary to determine the exact total online capacity for the entire rig. Therefore, the Amphion power system calculates a total power consumed value by reading the power consumed value from each drilling tool at the drilling bus. It then calculates a system capacity value by adding the power available value received from the rig’s PMS to its calculated total power consumed value. (PMS) Power Available + Total Power Consumed (Drilling Bus) = System Capacity

19-10 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 19-11 of 14

19

Power System

Total Online Capacity When the rigs’s PMS opts to provide a power consumed signal, they must also provide the online status of the generators as a seperate set of signals.the Amphion power system tracks the total online capacity value for the rig. It uses the generator online status signals to determine the Total Online Capacity. (Capacity of 1 Generator) x (Number of Generators Online) = Total Online Capacity The Amphion power system also calculates a power available value by subtracting the power consumed value from the total online capacity value. Total Online Capacity - Power Consumed (PMS) = Power Available The Amphion power system uses this calculated power available value in the same manner as described in the section titled "System Capacity" on page 19-10.

DC Rectifier Capacity For most rigs, the maximum rated capacity value for each rectifier can be set using the Debug Monitor module’s powerPlant.co.maxKwAtRect file. The rectifiers’ default values depend on your particular rig configuration. The Amphion power system calculates the rectifiers’ individual total capacity values by using one of the following calculated value or method: R

By adding the consumed power value (from the rectifier) to the available power value (from the AC Bus)

Consumed Power (rectifier) + Available Power (AC Bus) = Total Capacity R

By using the maximum rated capacity value of the rectifier

The system uses whichever value is lowest. If a rectifier is not online, its reported total capacity value is zero.

DC Bus Capacity The Amphion power system calculates the DC bus capacity value based on the sum of all online rectifiers’ capacity values. This could be calculated using either the individual total capacity values, or by using the sum of the individual maximum rated capacity values as described in the section above, titled "DC Rectifier Capacity.”

19-11 www.nov.com

19

Power System

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 19-12 of 14

Power Consumed Calculations

The method that the Amphion power system uses to determine total system power consumed varies based on your particular rig configuration.

DC Bus Consumed The Amphion power system calculates the DC bus power consumed value based on the sum of all power consumed values read from each of the tool inverters. On rigs with multiple DC buses, the system maintains separate power consumed values for each DC bus.

AC Bus Consumed When the Amphion power system is monitoring the status of the generators (as is normally the case on smaller rigs) it determines the AC bus power consumed value based on the sum of the load kW values read from each generator. When the Amphion power system is receiving a power consumed value from a larger rig’s power management system (PMS), it uses the value provided by the PMS as the AC bus power consumed value.

19-12 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 19-13 of 14

19

Power System

Power Available Calculations System Total Power Available The Amphion power system calculates the system’s total power available value by subtracting the total power consumed value from the total online capacity value. Total Online Capacity - Total Power Consumed = Total Available Power

Tool Power Available (General) Individual tools read power capacity and power consumed values from the power system’s tool controller to determine the available power value. Programming code stored on each tool’s controller determines whether the power available value is sufficient for its purposes, or if the tool needs to go into power limit mode. See the following section titled "Power Limiting.” In other words, the power system tool controller does not determine whether a tool is placed in power limit mode; rather, the individual tool’s controller determines this, based on the power available value and the parameters set up within the tool’s controller.

Power Limiting Generally speaking, if the power demands exceed the power available, the maximum power consumption allowed for all drives is reduced simultaneously. While there is normally no prioritization of one tool versus another (unless your rig is configured as such), power may not be reduced proportionally between the tools consuming power. The system is designed to ensure that there is always enough torque to hold the static load of the drawworks. In addition, power limiting is dynamic, so all power can be diverted to a single drive if the other drives are not demanding that power. The motor control center (MCC) and lighting circuits are not subject to power limiting, so the power they consume also reduces the total shared power available.

19-13 www.nov.com

19

Power System

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 19-14 of 14

19-14 www.nov.com

FINAL DOCUMENTATION Amphion Operator’s Guide

Section 1.20 Racker (Bridge Racker)

www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 20-1 of 48

Racker (Bridge Racker)

This chapter contains examples of Amphion operator interface screens and controls, and may or may not represent your particular rig configuration.

Operator Screen Press Tools --> Racker to display the Bridge Racker operator screen.

Tool Ownership Assume ownership of the racker to enable controls. See section titled "Tool Ownership" on page 234.

20-1 www.nov.com

20

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 20-2 of 48

Racker (Bridge Racker)

Fingerboards By default, the center of the Racker operator screen displays the fingerboards. While latches are closed, pipes in the fingerboard display as solid black circles, and contain a white number assignment. A black number inside a white circle signifies an empty pipe slot.

Empty slots

Zooming In on a Fingerboard Section Touch one of the fingerboard sections to “zoom in” on a section.

Selecting a Fingerboard Work Area 1. Press once to specify a starting range of slots for use by the racker. The row displays a green background. 2. Press again to specify the end of the range (this can be in the same slot). The entire range selection displays a blue background. If the racker is delivering pipe into the fingerboard, the first available slot in the range contains a red outline, indicating where the racker will place the next pipe. If the racker is picking up pipe from the fingerboard, the pipe displays solid red, indicating the next pipe to be picked up. Press anywhere outside of the “zoomed in” fingerboard area to return to the default Fingerboard/ Racker operator screen.

20-2 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 20-3 of 48

Racker (Bridge Racker)

20

Status Displays The current tool mode, tool selection, operate mode, and fingerboard mode are displayed along the top of the screen, as well as the current pipe diameter, pipe type, and pipe weight.

These settings can be defined by the user: R

See section titled "Defining the Tool Mode" on page 20-7.

R

See section titled "Defining the Tool Selection" on page 20-8.

R

See section titled "Defining the Operation Mode" on page 20-10.

R

See section titled "Defining the Fingerboard Mode" on page 20-12.

R

See section titled "Defining the Pipe Diameter" on page 20-14.

R

See section titled "Defining the Pipe Type" on page 20-14.

R

See section titled "Defining the Pipe Weight" on page 20-15.

A graphical representation of the racker displays along the left side of the screen, illustrating the current position and state of the roller, grip, and guide arm. The Joystick State display located in the bottom right portion of the screen indicates the current destination of the racker based on joystick movement and the current operation mode. See section titled "Defining the Operation Mode" on page 20-10. The right side of the screen contains green, yellow, red, or grey status and fault displays.

Green = Active/True Grey = Idle

Yellow = Active/True Grey = Idle

Red = Fault State Grey = Idle/OK

See general descriptions below.

20-3 www.nov.com

20

Racker (Bridge Racker)

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 20-4 of 48

Pipe Set Down

Displays green when the pipe reaches setdown.

Jaw – Pipe Detected

Displays green when the racker jaw detects a pipe.

Claw – Pipe Detected

Displays green when the guide arm claw detects a pipe.

Tools Synchronized

Displays green when the racker and the guide arm are synchronized.

Pin Clear

Displays green to indicate that the pin end of the tubular has been hoisted clear of the deck, mouse hole or box at well center.

Axis Override Active

Displays yellow to indicate that the racker’s axis override mode is active. See section titled "Defining the Operation Mode" on page 20-9 for more information.

Jaw Removed

Displays yellow to indicate that the racker gripper jaw is removed.

Claw Removed

Displays yellow to indicate that the guide arm claw is removed.

ZMS Interlock

Displays red to indicate that a ZMS interlock is preventing further movement of the tool. See Chapter 27, titled "Zone Management System (ZMS).”

Hyd Pressure Low

Displays red to indicate that the hydraulic pressure drops below an acceptable level.

FB Comms Fault

Displays red to indicate failed communication with the fingerboard system.

ZMS Comms Fault

Displays red to indicate failed communication with the ZMS.

Operator Messages

Display along the bottom of the screen.

20-4 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 20-5 of 48

Racker (Bridge Racker)

20

Jaw and Tool Override Controls

For safety reasons, this function must be activated from another touchscreen. Use operator override modes with caution. Significant risk of equipment damage and danger to personnel exists when the override is engaged. Failure to observe and follow proper safe working procedures could result in serious or fatal injury to personnel, significant equipment damage, and extended rig down time.

Press Jaw Override to open the racker’s gripper jaw without pipe setdown requirements. Press Tool Override to override the normal operating mode of the selected tool.

20-5 www.nov.com

20

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 20-6 of 48

Racker (Bridge Racker)

Backup Controls Press the Backup Controls button located in the bottom right portion of the operator screen to display the Backup Controls screen.

This screen allows the operator to control the tool using the on-screen controls. R

Hoist Axis: Press and drag the red circle vertically along the Hoist Axis grid to raise and lower the tool.

R

Main Joystick Display: The red circle in the Main Joystick display indicates the current position of the joystick.

R

Jaws/Claw: Press Jaws/Claw - Open or Close to open or close the jaws or the claw, depending on which tool is selected. You can also control the jaws using the Jaws - Open/Close switch located on the workstation’s left control panel.

DRIL

L

TDS

LINK

OPE N

TILT

FLO AT TDS

CLO SE

LINK

OPE N CLO

SE

OPE N

TDS ELE VAT OR RAC

KER

OFF /AUT O

CLO SE

JAW

CLO S

E

DRAW

OVE WORKS RRID E PAR KIN

G BR

AKE

DOLL Y

R AC

KER

JAW

ENA B

LE SLIP SE

OPE N

NAB LE

CLO SE

IBOP

20-6 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 20-7 of 48

Racker (Bridge Racker)

20

Jaw and Tool Override Controls

Use operator override modes with caution. Significant risk of equipment damage and danger to personnel exists when the override is engaged. Failure to observe and follow proper safe working procedures could result in serious or fatal injury to personnel, significant equipment damage, and extended rig down time.

See section titled "Jaw and Tool Override Controls" on page 20-5.

Fingerboard Controls Press Fingerboard Controls to display the default Racker operator screen. See section titled "Fingerboards" on page 20-2.

Defining the Tool Mode Press the Tool Mode button to display its pop-up window.

Press the Tool Mode - Normal or Park button to select a mode: R

Normal: Use during normal racker operations.

R

Park: Use to park the racker. The operator can also run the racker to jaw change positions in Park mode.

A green backlight marks the current selection. Press OK to close the pop-up window.

20-7 www.nov.com

20

Racker (Bridge Racker)

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 20-8 of 48

Defining the Tool Selection Press the Tool Selection button to display its pop-up window.

Press to select the Tool Selection - Guide Arm, Sync, or Bridge: R

Guide Arm: Select this option to operate the guide arm independently of the bridge racker. This function allows the racker to tail pipe from one location to another, while the upper end of the stand is supported by other means.

R

Sync: Select this option to run both the bridge racker and the guide arm in unison. This is the default, or normal running mode.

R

Bridge: Select this option to operate the bridge racker independently of the guide arm. This mode can be used to allow tripping to continue in situations where the guide arm cannot be used to tail the lower end of the tubular.

A green backlight marks the current selection. Press OK to close the pop-up window.

20-8 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 20-9 of 48

Racker (Bridge Racker)

20

Joystick Controls A joystick mounted on the right control panel may control either the bridge racker or the drawworks, depending on tool ownership status and your particular rig configuration.

Lower

Upper Lower

Hoist Dead man switch +Y +X

-X

-Y

For each joystick operational function (hoist, rotate, travel, and arm movement), the degree of joystick movement determines the speed of racker movement. For example, if you move the joystick only slightly, the racker operates at a slow speed. If you move the joystick all the way to the end of an axis, the racker operates at maximum speed. Moving the racker joystick affects racker destinations, which vary depending on its current mode (selected via the user interface) and your rig configuration. See section titled "Defining the Operation Mode" on page 20-10.

Tool ownership logic prevents the operator from owning both the drawworks and the racker simultaneously. See section titled "Tool Ownership" on page 2-34, and Chapter 10, titled "Drawworks” for more information.

20-9 www.nov.com

20

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 20-10 of 48

Racker (Bridge Racker)

Defining the Operation Mode Press Operate Mode to display its pop-up window.

Axis Override Modes Press and hold the Axis Override Mode - X/Y, Polar, Traverse button to use the desired operation mode. When the button is released, the tool returns to normal operating mode. Press the Manual On/Off toggle button to begin using manual mode; press again to exit manual mode. See section titled "Manual Override Mode" on page 20-11. A green backlight marks the current selection. The illustration shown here depicts examples of each axis override mode and possible destinations based on joystick movement and your particular rig configuration. X-Y Override

Polar

Setback Area

Extend Arms

V-Door

Drawworks

Well Center

Traverse

Slew Drawworks

Setback

Slew V-Door

Arms Retract

(N/A)

(N/A)

Well Center

R

X/Y Override: Use this mode to allow the tool jaw to be moved in a straight line along a designated vertical or horizontal axis.

R

Polar Override: Use this mode to drive the tool into a position that allows the bridge racker to slew clockwise and counterclockwise in an arc (similar to that of an extended guide arm).

R

Traverse Override: Use this mode to allow either the bridge racker, guide arm, or both tools’ travel axis to be driven without any other axis. In this mode, the tools can run only along their designated travel axis.

Press the appropriate HELP button located beneath each mode button for additional information. Press OK to close the pop-up window and display the current mode’s operator screen.

20-10 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 20-11 of 48

20

Racker (Bridge Racker)

Manual Override Mode This override mode is normally used only when the bridge racker must be moved back to a position close enough to the guide arm to allow for easier synchronization.

Only the bridge racker is available in this mode. Use the maintenance mode screens to operate the tool for maintenance purposes.

At the Operate Mode pop-up window (see section titled "Defining the Operation Mode" on page 20-10 above), press the Manual On/Off toggle button to enable or disable manual mode. Press OK to close the pop-up window and display the Manual Mode operator screen.

Each axis can be selected for precise positioning of the bridge racker. Press to select an axis. A green backlight marks the current selection. The illustration shown below depicts each axis and possible destinations based on joystick movement and your rig configuration.

20-11 www.nov.com

20

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 20-12 of 48

Racker (Bridge Racker)

Trolley V-Door

Drawworks

Well Center

Fingerboard

Slew

Up

Well Center

V-Door

Drawworks

Hoist

Travel

Down

Fingerboard

Counter-clockwise (CCW)

Up

Down

CW

CCW

Clockwise (CW)

Defining the Fingerboard Mode Press the FB Mode button to display the Fingerboard pop-up window.

Set Mode Press Fingerboard - Set Mode to display the Fingerboard Mode pop-up window.

Press the FB Mode - Auto, Sequence, or Manual button to select a fingerboard mode, then press OK.

20-12 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 20-13 of 48

20

Racker (Bridge Racker)

R

In Auto mode, the racker carries pipe to and from the fingerboard in pre-defined sequences. Fingerboard latches open or close automatically as pipe is collected from or taken to the fingerboard by the racker. (The jaw state of the racker dictates whether the latches are opened or closed.)

R

In Sequence mode, the racker carries pipe to and from the fingerboard in predefined sequences (as in Auto mode), but the operator controls the opening and closing of the latches by pressing the Activate button on the screen. (The jaw state of the racker dictates whether the latches are opened or closed.)

R

In Manual mode, the operator manually selects the fingerboard slots and controls the opening and closing of the latches. Automatic movement of the racker is prohibited in this mode.

Set Begin/End Press Fingerboard - Set Begin/End to display the Set Fingerboard Begin/End pop-up window.

Use this pop-up window to set the range of fingerboard slots for the racker to use when racking pipe. Press the appropriate button to display its keypad pop-up window. Define the value, then press Set to confirm and close the keypad. Press OK to close the Set Fingerboard Begin/End pop-up window.

20-13 www.nov.com

20

Racker (Bridge Racker)

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 20-14 of 48

Defining the Pipe Diameter Press Pipe Dia to display the Pipe Diameter keypad pop-up window. Define the value, then press Set to confirm and close the keypad.

Defining the Pipe Type Press Pipe Type to display the Pipe Type pop-up window.

Press the Pipe Type - Pipe, Collar, or Casing button to select the appropriate pipe type, then press OK to close the pop-up window.

Speed is reduced in casing and collar modes.

20-14 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 20-15 of 48

Racker (Bridge Racker)

20

Defining the Pipe Weight Press Pipe Weight to display its keypad pop-up window.

Define the weight value of the tubular to be handled, then press Set to confirm and close the keypad.

! The value entered here must be accurate, as the system uses this weight value to calculate thread compensation.

20-15 www.nov.com

20

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 20-16 of 48

Racker (Bridge Racker)

Racker Tool Menu Press the Racker button located on the main menu bar to display its tool menu.

See section titled "Utility Menu" on page 2-13.

See section titled "Common Diagnostics Menu" on page 2-19.

See Chapter 3, titled "Alarms and Events.”

See section titled "Axis Position Overview" on page 20-48.

See section titled "Setup Menu" on page 20-17.

See section titled "Maintenance Mode" on page 2-11.

See section titled "Operator Screen" on page 20-1.

20-16 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 20-17 of 48

Racker (Bridge Racker)

20

Setup Menu Press Racker --> Setup to display the Setup menu.

Maintenance Mode and Calibration Press Setup --> Maintenance Mode and Calibration to display the Maintenance Mode and Calibration screen.

The racker must be on, and placed in maintenance mode before calibration can begin. Green Tool On and Maintenance Mode On displays indicate that both states are true. See section titled "Maintenance Mode" on page 2-11.

20-17 www.nov.com

20

Racker (Bridge Racker)

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 20-18 of 48

Axis Calibration

Ensure that all sensors are functioning properly prior to calibrating any axis. Never calibrate an axis while the tool is holding pipe. Each axis can be driven through its full range of movement. Use extreme caution when operating the bridge racker while maintenance mode is engaged. The tool ignores safety interlocks, allowing it to enter a zone already occupied, and possibly collide with another tool. Significant risk of equipment damage and danger to personnel exists when maintenance mode is engaged. Failure to follow safe work procedures could result in serious or fatal injury to personnel, significant equipment damage, and extended rig down time.

At the Maintenance Mode and Calibration screen, press Axis Calibration to display the main Axis Calibration screen.

Press to select an axis, then follow screen prompts to calibrate the racker.

20-18 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 20-19 of 48

Racker (Bridge Racker)

20

Bridge Racker Trolley 1. At the Bridge Racker Axis Calibration screen, press Bridge Racker Trolley to display its first calibration screen.

2. Move the bridge racker to its calibration point, then press Next to write the calibration values to the tool controller and display the second calibration screen.

3. Move the bridge racker to ensure that it is operating properly, then press Finish. Bridge racker trolley calibration is complete.

20-19 www.nov.com

20

Racker (Bridge Racker)

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 20-20 of 48

Bridge Racker Aft Traverse 1. At the Bridge Racker Axis Calibration screen, press Bridge Racker Aft Traverse to display its first calibration screen.

2. Move the bridge racker to its calibration point, then press Next to write the calibration values to the tool controller and display the second calibration screen.

3. Move the bridge racker to ensure that it is operating properly, then press Finish. Bridge racker aft traverse calibration is complete.

20-20 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 20-21 of 48

Racker (Bridge Racker)

20

Bridge Racker Fore Traverse 1. At the Bridge Racker Axis Calibration screen, press Bridge Racker Fore Traverse to display its first calibration screen.

2. Move the bridge racker to its calibration point, then press Next to write the calibration values to the tool controller and display the second calibration screen.

3. Move the bridge racker to ensure that it is operating properly, then press Finish. Bridge racker fore traverse calibration is complete.

20-21 www.nov.com

20

Racker (Bridge Racker)

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 20-22 of 48

Bridge Racker Slew 1. At the Bridge Racker Axis Calibration screen, press Bridge Racker Slew to display its first calibration screen.

2. Rotate the bridge racker to its calibration point, then press Next to write the calibration values to the tool controller and display the second calibration screen.

3. Rotate the bridge racker to ensure that it is operating properly, then press Finish. Bridge racker slew calibration is complete.

20-22 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 20-23 of 48

Racker (Bridge Racker)

20

Bridge Racker Hoist 1. At the Bridge Racker Axis Calibration screen, press Bridge Racker Hoist to display its first calibration screen.

2. Move the bridge racker to its calibration point, then press Next to write the calibration values to the tool controller and display the second calibration screen.

3. Move the bridge racker to ensure that it is operating properly, then press Finish. Bridge racker hoist calibration is complete.

20-23 www.nov.com

20

Racker (Bridge Racker)

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 20-24 of 48

Thread Compensation Cylinder 1. At the Bridge Racker Axis Calibration screen, press Bridge Racker Thread Comp Cyl to display its first calibration screen.

2. Move the bridge racker to its calibration point, then press Next to write the calibration values to the tool controller and display the second calibration screen.

3. Move the bridge racker to ensure that it is operating properly, then press Finish. Thread compensation cylinder calibration is complete.

20-24 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 20-25 of 48

Racker (Bridge Racker)

20

Guide Arm Trolley 1. At the Bridge Racker Axis Calibration screen, press Guide Arm Trolley to display its first calibration screen.

2. Move the bridge racker to its calibration point, then press Next to write the calibration values to the tool controller and display the second calibration screen.

3. Move the bridge racker to ensure that it is operating properly, then press Finish. Guide arm trolley calibration is complete.

20-25 www.nov.com

20

Racker (Bridge Racker)

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 20-26 of 48

Guide Arm Shoulder 1. At the Bridge Racker Axis Calibration screen, press Guide Arm Shoulder to display its first calibration screen.

2. Rotate the bridge racker to its calibration point, then press Next to write the calibration values to the tool controller and display the second calibration screen.

3. Rotate the bridge racker to ensure that it is operating properly, then press Finish. Guide arm shoulder calibration is complete.

20-26 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 20-27 of 48

Racker (Bridge Racker)

20

Guide Arm Wrist 1. At the Bridge Racker Axis Calibration screen, press Guide Arm Wrist to display its first calibration screen.

2. Move the bridge racker to its calibration point, then press Next to write the calibration values to the tool controller and display the second calibration screen.

3. Move the bridge racker to ensure that it is operating properly, then press Finish. Guide arm wrist calibration is complete.

20-27 www.nov.com

20

Racker (Bridge Racker)

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 20-28 of 48

Guide Arm Slew 1. At the Bridge Racker Axis Calibration screen, press Guide Arm Slew to display its first calibration screen.

2. Rotate the bridge racker to its calibration point, then press Next to write the calibration values to the tool controller and display the second calibration screen.

3. Rotate the bridge racker to ensure that it is operating properly, then press Finish. Guide arm slew calibration is complete.

20-28 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 20-29 of 48

Racker (Bridge Racker)

20

Guide Arm Telescope 1. At the Bridge Racker Axis Calibration screen, press Guide Arm Telescope to display its first calibration screen.

2. Move the bridge racker to its calibration point, then press Next to write the calibration values to the tool controller and display the second calibration screen.

3. Move the bridge racker to ensure that it is operating properly, then press Finish. Guide arm telescope calibration is complete.

20-29 www.nov.com

20

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 20-30 of 48

Racker (Bridge Racker)

Bridge Racker Calibration

Use extreme caution when operating the bridge racker while maintenance mode is engaged. The tool ignores safety interlocks, allowing it to enter a zone already occupied, and possibly collide with another tool. Failure to follow safe work procedures could result in serious or fatal injury to personnel, significant equipment damage, and extended rig down time.

At the Maintenance Mode and Calibration screen, press Bridge Racker to display the main Bridge Racker Calibration screen.

! A red Low Hydraulic Pressure display indicates that hydraulic pressure has fallen below an acceptable level. Correct the situation before continuing calibration procedures.

The center portion of the screen depicts the current position of the joystick, and related racker destinations. See section titled "Defining the Operation Mode" on page 20-10 for information about joystick movement and racker destinations as it relates to the currently-selected operation mode. Press the racker’s Jaw - (Open or Close) button to control the racker jaws. See section titled "Jaw and Tool Override Controls" on page 20-5 for more information. Select an axis to begin calibration.

20-30 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 20-31 of 48

20

Racker (Bridge Racker)

Trolley

Read all warnings, cautions, and information starting on page 20-30 before beginning calibration procedures in this section.

At the Bridge Racker Calibration screen, press the Select Axis - Trolley button display the Trolley Calibration screen.

The current Trolley Position displays in the top left portion of the screen. The center portion of the screen depicts the current position of the joystick, and related racker destinations. See section titled "Defining the Operation Mode" on page 20-10 for information about joystick movement and racker destinations as it relates to the currently-selected operation mode. Press the racker’s Jaw - (Open or Close) button to control the racker jaws. See section titled "Jaw and Tool Override Controls" on page 20-5 for more information. 1. Ensure that the correct pipe type is defined. See section titled "Defining the Pipe Type" on page 20-14. 2. Ensure that the correct tubular diameter is set. See section titled "Defining the Pipe Diameter" on page 20-14. 3. Using the joystick, move the racker toward each possible destination, ensuring that the racker is operating properly. Press Main Page to return to the main Maintenance Mode and Calibration screen.

20-31 www.nov.com

20

Racker (Bridge Racker)

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 20-32 of 48

Travel

Read all warnings, cautions, and information starting on page 20-31 before beginning calibration procedures in this section.

At the Bridge Racker Calibration screen, press the Select Axis - Travel button display the Travel Calibration screen.

The top left portion of the screen contains displays of the current positions for both the Fore and the Aft Bridge. The center portion of the screen depicts the current position of the joystick, and related racker destinations. See section titled "Defining the Operation Mode" on page 20-10 for information about joystick movement and racker destinations as it relates to the currently-selected operation mode. Press the racker’s Jaw - (Open or Close) button to control the racker jaws. See section titled "Jaw and Tool Override Controls" on page 20-5 for more information. 1. Ensure that the correct pipe type is defined. See section titled "Defining the Pipe Type" on page 20-14. 2. Ensure that the correct tubular diameter is set. See section titled "Defining the Pipe Diameter" on page 20-14. 3. Press and hold one of the Travel Override Mode buttons 4. Using the joystick, move the racker toward each possible destination, ensuring that the racker is operating properly. 5. Repeat this procedure using each of the Travel Override Modes. Press Main Page to return to the main Maintenance Mode and Calibration screen.

20-32 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 20-33 of 48

20

Racker (Bridge Racker)

Hoist

Read all warnings, cautions, and information starting on page 20-31 before beginning calibration procedures in this section.

At the Bridge Racker Calibration screen, press the Select Axis - Hoist button display the Hoist Calibration screen.

The top left portion of the screen displays the current Hoist Position. The center portion of the screen depicts the current position of the joystick, and related racker destinations. See section titled "Defining the Operation Mode" on page 20-10 for information about joystick movement and racker destinations as it relates to the currently-selected operation mode. Press the racker’s Jaw - (Open or Close) button to control the racker jaws. See section titled "Jaw and Tool Override Controls" on page 20-5 for more information. 1. Ensure that the correct pipe type is defined. See section titled "Defining the Pipe Type" on page 20-14. 2. Ensure that the correct tubular diameter is set. See section titled "Defining the Pipe Diameter" on page 20-14. 3. Using the joystick, move the racker toward each possible destination, ensuring that the racker is operating properly. Press Main Page to return to the main Maintenance Mode and Calibration screen.

20-33 www.nov.com

20

Racker (Bridge Racker)

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 20-34 of 48

Slew

Read all warnings, cautions, and information starting on page 20-31 before beginning calibration procedures in this section.

At the Bridge Racker Calibration screen, press the Select Axis - Slew button display the Slew Calibration screen.

The top left portion of the screen displays the current Slew Position. The center portion of the screen depicts the current position of the joystick, and related racker destinations. See section titled "Defining the Operation Mode" on page 20-10 for information about joystick movement and racker destinations as it relates to the currently-selected operation mode. Press the racker’s Jaw - (Open or Close) button to control the racker jaws. See section titled "Jaw and Tool Override Controls" on page 20-5 for more information. 1. Ensure that the correct pipe type is defined. See section titled "Defining the Pipe Type" on page 20-14. 2. Ensure that the correct tubular diameter is set. See section titled "Defining the Pipe Diameter" on page 20-14. 3. Rotating the joystick, move the racker toward each possible destination, ensuring that the racker is operating properly. Press Main Page to return to the main Maintenance Mode and Calibration screen.

20-34 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 20-35 of 48

20

Racker (Bridge Racker)

Guide Arm Calibration At the Maintenance Mode and Calibration screen, press Guide Arm to display the main Guide Arm Calibration screen.

! A red Low Hydraulic Pressure display indicates that hydraulic pressure has fallen below an acceptable level. Correct the situation before continuing calibration procedures.

The center portion of the screen depicts the current position of the joystick, and related racker destinations. See section titled "Defining the Operation Mode" on page 20-10 for information about joystick movement and racker destinations as it relates to the currently-selected operation mode. Press the racker’s Jaw - (Open or Close) button to control the racker jaws. See section titled "Jaw and Tool Override Controls" on page 20-5 for more information. The center portion of the screen depicts the current position of the joystick, and related racker destinations. See section titled "Defining the Operation Mode" on page 20-10 for information about joystick movement and racker destinations as it relates to the currently-selected operation mode. Press the racker’s Jaw - (Open or Close) button to control the racker jaws. See section titled "Jaw and Tool Override Controls" on page 20-5 for more information. Select an axis to begin calibration.

20-35 www.nov.com

20

Racker (Bridge Racker)

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 20-36 of 48

Traverse

Read all warnings, cautions, and information starting on page 20-35 before beginning calibration procedures in this section.

At the Guide Arm Calibration screen, press Traverse to display the Traverse Calibration screen.

The top left portion of the screen displays the current Trolley Position. The center portion of the screen depicts the current position of the joystick, and related racker destinations. See section titled "Defining the Operation Mode" on page 20-10 for information about joystick movement and racker destinations as it relates to the currently-selected axis. Press the racker’s Jaw - (Open or Close) button to control the racker jaws. See section titled "Jaw and Tool Override Controls" on page 20-5 for more information. 1. Ensure that the correct pipe type is defined. See section titled "Defining the Pipe Type" on page 20-14. 2. Ensure that the correct tubular diameter is set. See section titled "Defining the Pipe Diameter" on page 20-14. 3. Using the joystick, move the guide arm toward each possible destination, ensuring that it is operating properly. Press Main Page to return to the main Maintenance Mode and Calibration screen.

20-36 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 20-37 of 48

20

Racker (Bridge Racker)

Slew

Read all warnings, cautions, and information starting on page 20-31 before beginning calibration procedures in this section.

At the Guide Arm Calibration screen, press Slew to display the Slew Calibration screen.

The top left portion of the screen displays the current Slew Position. The center portion of the screen depicts the current position of the joystick, and related racker destinations. See section titled "Defining the Operation Mode" on page 20-10 for information about joystick movement and racker destinations as it relates to the currently-selected operation mode. Press the racker’s Jaw - (Open or Close) button to control the racker jaws. See section titled "Jaw and Tool Override Controls" on page 20-5 for more information. 1. Ensure that the correct pipe type is defined. See section titled "Defining the Pipe Type" on page 20-14. 2. Ensure that the correct tubular diameter is set. See section titled "Defining the Pipe Diameter" on page 20-14. 3. Rotating the joystick through its full range of motion, move the guide arm toward each possible destination, ensuring that it is operating properly. Press Main Page to return to the main Maintenance Mode and Calibration screen.

20-37 www.nov.com

20

Racker (Bridge Racker)

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 20-38 of 48

Shoulder

Read all warnings, cautions, and information starting on page 20-31 before beginning calibration procedures in this section.

At the Guide Arm Calibration screen, press Shoulder to display the Shoulder Calibration screen.

The top left portion of the screen displays the current Shoulder Angle. The center portion of the screen depicts the current position of the joystick, and related racker destinations. See section titled "Defining the Operation Mode" on page 20-10 for information about joystick movement and racker destinations as it relates to the currently-selected operation mode. Press the racker’s Jaw - (Open or Close) button to control the racker jaws. See section titled "Jaw and Tool Override Controls" on page 20-5 for more information. 1. Ensure that the correct pipe type is defined. See section titled "Defining the Pipe Type" on page 20-14. 2. Ensure that the correct tubular diameter is set. See section titled "Defining the Pipe Diameter" on page 20-14. 3. Using the joystick, move the guide arm toward each possible destination, ensuring that it is operating properly. Press Main Page to return to the main Maintenance Mode and Calibration screen.

20-38 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 20-39 of 48

20

Racker (Bridge Racker)

Telescope

Read all warnings, cautions, and information starting on page 20-31 before beginning calibration procedures in this section.

At the Guide Arm Calibration screen, press Telescope to display the Telescope Calibration screen.

The top left portion of the screen displays the current Telescope position. The center portion of the screen depicts the current position of the joystick, and related racker destinations. See section titled "Defining the Operation Mode" on page 20-10 for information about joystick movement and racker destinations as it relates to the currently-selected operation mode. Press the racker’s Jaw - (Open or Close) button to control the racker jaws. See section titled "Jaw and Tool Override Controls" on page 20-5 for more information. 1. Ensure that the correct pipe type is defined. See section titled "Defining the Pipe Type" on page 20-14. 2. Ensure that the correct tubular diameter is set. See section titled "Defining the Pipe Diameter" on page 20-14. 3. Using the joystick, move the guide arm toward each possible destination, ensuring that it is operating properly. Press Main Page to return to the main Maintenance Mode and Calibration screen.

20-39 www.nov.com

20

Racker (Bridge Racker)

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 20-40 of 48

Wrist

Read all warnings, cautions, and information starting on page 20-31 before beginning calibration procedures in this section.

At the Guide Arm Calibration screen, press Wrist to display the Wrist Calibration screen.

The top left portion of the screen displays the current Wrist position. The center portion of the screen depicts the current position of the joystick, and related racker destinations. See section titled "Defining the Operation Mode" on page 20-10 for information about joystick movement and racker destinations as it relates to the currently-selected operation mode. Press the racker’s Jaw - (Open or Close) button to control the racker jaws. See section titled "Jaw and Tool Override Controls" on page 20-5 for more information. 1. Ensure that the correct pipe type is defined. See section titled "Defining the Pipe Type" on page 20-14. 2. Ensure that the correct tubular diameter is set. See section titled "Defining the Pipe Diameter" on page 20-14. 3. Using the joystick, move the guide arm toward each possible destination, ensuring that it is operating properly. Press Main Page to return to the main Maintenance Mode and Calibration screen.

20-40 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 20-41 of 48

Racker (Bridge Racker)

20

ATOS Calibration At the Maintenance Mode and Calibration screen, press ATOS Calibration to display the Bridge Racker ATOS Calibration screen.

Bridge Racker Trolley At the ATOS Calibration screen, press Bridge Racker Trolley to display the Bridge Racker Trolley ATOS Calibration screen.

20-41 www.nov.com

20

Racker (Bridge Racker)

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 20-42 of 48

Bridge Racker Aft Traverse At the ATOS Calibration screen, press Bridge Racker Aft Traverse to display the Bridge Racker Aft Traverse ATOS Calibration screen.

Bridge Racker Fore Traverse At the ATOS Calibration screen, press Bridge Racker Fore Traverse to display the Bridge Fore Traverse ATOS Calibration screen.

20-42 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 20-43 of 48

20

Racker (Bridge Racker)

Bridge Racker Hoist At the ATOS Calibration screen, press Bridge Racker Hoist to display the Bridge Racker Hoist ATOS Calibration screen.

Thread Comp At the ATOS Calibration screen, press Thread Comp to display the Thread Comp ATOS Calibration screen.

20-43 www.nov.com

20

Racker (Bridge Racker)

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 20-44 of 48

Guide Arm Trolley At the ATOS Calibration screen, press Guide Arm Trolley to display the Guide Arm Trolley ATOS Calibration screen.

Guide Arm Shoulder At the ATOS Calibration screen, press Guide Arm Shoulder to display the Guide Arm Shoulder ATOS Calibration screen.

20-44 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 20-45 of 48

20

Racker (Bridge Racker)

Guide Arm Wrist At the ATOS Calibration screen, press Guide Arm Wrist to display the Guide Arm Wrist ATOS Calibration screen.

Guide Arm Slew At the ATOS Calibration screen, press Guide Arm Slew to display the Guide Arm Slew ATOS Calibration screen.

20-45 www.nov.com

20

Racker (Bridge Racker)

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 20-46 of 48

Guide Arm Telescope At the ATOS Calibration screen, press Guide Arm Telescope to display the Guide Arm Telescope ATOS Calibration screen.

20-46 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 20-47 of 48

Racker (Bridge Racker)

20

Thread Comp Calibration

! Use extreme caution during calibration. This mode adjusts pressure to the thread compensation hydraulic circuits. Hoist the carriage while using the controls described in this section.

Press Setup --> Thread Comp Calibration to display the Thread Compensation Calibration screen.

Press Bypass Valve Control - Open or Close to open or close the bypass valve. Perform the following steps for thread compensation calibration: 1. Press Maintenance Mode - On to enable maintenance mode. 2. Press On to enable (Pressure or Position) PID Setup. 3. Press and move each slider control to the desired percentage value. 4. Press Off to disable (Pressure or Position) PID Setup 5. Press Maintenance Mode - Off to disable maintenance mode.

20-47 www.nov.com

20

Racker (Bridge Racker)

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 20-48 of 48

Axis Position Overview Press Racker --> Status to display the Status menu.

Press Axis Position Overview to display the Axis Positions screen.

This screen displays digital readings and vertical graphs that depict the current position of the bridge racker and guide arm axes. It also displays pressure readings and setpoint information.

20-48 www.nov.com

FINAL DOCUMENTATION Amphion Operator’s Guide

Section 1.21 Racker (Pipe Racking System PRS)

www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 21-1 of 14

Racker (Pipe Racking System PRS)

This chapter contains general information about the Amphion interface and controls, and may or may not represent your particular rig configuration.

Operator Screen Press Tools --> Racker to display the Pipe Racking System (PRS) operator screen.

Tool Ownership Assume ownership of the racker to enable controls. See section titled "Tool Ownership" on page 234.

21-1 www.nov.com

21

Racker (Pipe Racking System PRS)

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 21-2 of 14

Status Displays A graphical representation of the racker displays along the left side of the screen, illustrating the current state of the jaws and the hoist and tail claws (several examples are shown here).

The currently-selected racker and fingerboard modes, tubular options, joystick status, and tubular lengths display along the top of the screen. A yellow Pipe Setdown display indicates the racker has reached pipe setdown; grey indicates that the pipe is not on the floor. Green communication status displays (Comms Healthy) indicate healthy communications; red indicates a fault or alarm state.

Operator messages display along the bottom of the screen.

21-2 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 21-3 of 14

Racker (Pipe Racking System PRS)

21

Fingerboards By default, the center of the Racker screen displays the fingerboards. Press the Fingerboards button at any time to display them again.

While latches are closed, pipes in the fingerboard display as solid black circles, and contain a white number assignment. A black number inside a white circle with a black outline signifies an empty pipe slot.

Zooming In on a Fingerboard Section Touch one of the fingerboard sections to “zoom in” on a section.

21-3 www.nov.com

21

Racker (Pipe Racking System PRS)

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 21-4 of 14

Press anywhere outside of the “zoomed in” fingerboard area to return to the default Fingerboard/ Racker screen.

21-4 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 21-5 of 14

21

Racker (Pipe Racking System PRS)

Selecting a Fingerboard Work Area 1. Press once to specify a starting range of slots for use by the racker. The row displays a green background. 2. Press again to specify the end of the range (this can be in the same slot). The entire range selection displays a blue background. If the racker is delivering pipe into the fingerboard, the first available slot in the range contains a red outline, indicating where the racker will place the next pipe. If the racker is picking up pipe from the fingerboard, the pipe displays solid red, indicating the next pipe to be picked up. Press anywhere outside of the “zoomed in” fingerboard area to return to the default Fingerboard/ Racker operator screen.

Fingerboard Options Press the Fingerboard Options button (located along the right side of the racker screen) to display the controls shown here.

Fingerboard Mode Press the Fingerboard Mode - Auto, Manual, or Sequence button to select a fingerboard mode. R

In Auto mode, the racker carries pipe to and from the fingerboard in pre-defined sequences. Fingerboard latches open or close automatically as pipe is collected from or taken to the fingerboard by the racker. (The jaw state dictates whether the latches are opened or closed.)

R

In Manual mode, the operator manually selects the fingerboard slots and controls latch opening and closing. Automatic movement of the racker is prohibited in this mode.

R

In Sequence mode, the racker carries pipe to and from the fingerboard in predefined sequences (as in Auto mode), but the operator controls latch opening and closing. (The jaw state dictates whether the latches are opened or closed.)

21-5 www.nov.com

21

Racker (Pipe Racking System PRS)

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 21-6 of 14

Racker Options Press the Racker Options button to display the controls shown here.

Racker Modes This section contains general information about racker modes. For more detailed information, see the model-specific document titled “Pipe Racking System Service Manual.” Press any of the Racker Mode buttons to select a mode: R

Tripping: Use during tripping operations.

R

Stands: Use to handle stands (3 pipes) from pickup to destination.

R

Singles: Use to move a single pipe (as opposed to a stand).

R

Parking: Use to park the racker; the operator can also run the racker to jaw change positions in Park mode.

The destination of the racker depends upon the racker’s mode selection and your rig configuration. See section titled "Joystick Controls and Help" on page 21-9.

Foxhole Selection Press to select Foxhole A or Foxhole B. A green backlight marks the current selection.

21-6 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 21-7 of 14

Racker (Pipe Racking System PRS)

21

Well/Foxhole Teach Press the Well/Foxhole Teach button when the racker is positioned at well center or the foxhole to “teach” the racker its arm rotation and current destination.

Jaw Override

Use extreme caution when overrides are engaged. The tool ignores safety interlocks, allowing it to enter a zone already occupied, and could easily collide with another tool. Significant risk of equipment damage and danger to personnel exists when the override is engaged. Failure to observe and follow proper safe working procedures could result in serious or fatal injury to personnel, significant equipment damage, and extended rig down time.

Press and hold the Jaw Override button to override jaw safety interlocks.

When the racker is gripping a pipe, the claw and grip are both closed. The grip will not open unless either another operator gives permission, or the operator presses the Jaw Override button. The grip will also remain open when tubular mode is set to Collar or Casing. When the button is released, the tool returns to normal operating mode.

See section titled "Workstation Override Controls" on page 21-12, and section titled "Tubular Options” below.

21-7 www.nov.com

21

Racker (Pipe Racking System PRS)

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 21-8 of 14

Tubular Options Press the Tubular Option button to display the controls shown here.

Pipe Selection Press Tubular Options - Pipe, Collar, or Casing to define the type of tubulars being handled. A green backlight marks the current selection.

Pipe Size Input Press Pipe Size Input to display the keypad and define the pipe size. Press Set to confirm the value and close the keypad.

Handling Tool Options Press Handling Tool Options - SJE (single joint elevator), FJE (flush joint elevator), or None (no handling tool) to select a handling tool.

Tubular Length Input R

Read from Conveyor: Use this option to allow the pipe transfer conveyor sensors automatically calculate the pipe length.

R

Manually Input: Use this option to display the keypad pop-up window and manually define the pipe length value. Press Set to confirm the value and close the keypad.

21-8 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 21-9 of 14

21

Racker (Pipe Racking System PRS)

Joystick Controls and Help The joystick mounted on the operator workstation’s right side controls either the racker or the drawworks (or the drawworks and the power slips), depending on tool ownership. Upper

Lower

Lower Hoist Dead man switch +Y +X

-X

-Y

For each joystick operational function (hoist, lower, travel, and arm movement), the degree of joystick movement determines the speed of racker movement. For example, if you move the joystick only slightly, the racker operates at a slow speed. If you move the joystick all the way to the end of an axis, the racker operates at maximum speed. The destination of the racker depends upon the racker mode selection. See section titled "Racker Modes" on page 21-6. Any movement of the joystick drives the racker toward the pre-programmed path of the selected section. Press the Joystick Help button to display the current destination of the racker through use of the joystick.

The screen shown above depicts possible racker destinations (using the joystick) while in Stands mode. The illustration below here depicts additional racker modes and possible destinations. Tripping

Stands

Singles

Parking

Fingerboard

Fingerboard

(N/A)

(N/A)

(N/A)

(N/A)

Well Center

Pick Up

Null

Foxhole

Pick Up

(N/A)

Well Center

Park

(N/A)

(N/A)

21-9 www.nov.com

21

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 21-10 of 14

Racker (Pipe Racking System PRS)

Racker Tool Menu Press the Racker button located on the main menu bar to display its tool menu.

See section titled "Utility Menu" on page 2-13.

See section titled "Common Diagnostics Menu" on page 2-19.

See Chapter 3, titled "Alarms and Events.”

See section titled "Calibration" on page 21-11.

See section titled "Maintenance Mode" on page 2-11.

See section titled "Operator Screen" on page 21-1.

21-10 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 21-11 of 14

Racker (Pipe Racking System PRS)

21

Calibration

Use extreme caution when operating the racker while maintenance mode is engaged. The tool ignores safety interlocks, allowing it to enter a zone already occupied, and possibly collide with another tool. Failure to follow safe work procedures could result in serious or fatal injury to personnel, significant equipment damage, and extended rig down time.

Press Racker --> Calibration to display the first Racker Calibration screen.

The racker must be turned on, and maintenance mode must be enabled before calibration can begin.

Press to select an axis to calibrate, then follow screen prompts to calibrate the racker.

21-11 www.nov.com

21

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 21-12 of 14

Racker (Pipe Racking System PRS)

Workstation Override Controls See Chapter 27, titled "Zone Management System (ZMS)” for more information about tool overrides.

Racker X/Y Override

Use extreme caution when overrides are engaged. The tool ignores safety interlocks, allowing it to enter a zone already occupied, and could easily collide with another tool. Significant risk of equipment damage and danger to personnel exists when the override is engaged. Failure to observe and follow proper safe working procedures could result in serious or fatal injury to personnel, significant equipment damage, and extended rig down time.

Press and hold the Racker X/Y Override button (normally located on the operator workstation’s left control panel) to override the X/Y interlocks.

OFF /AUT O

ON OPE

N

CLO

SE

TDS B

OPE N

TDS

RAK

E TDS FLO AT

CLO SE

DRIL

POW

ER S

L

TILT

OPE

N

LIPS

CLO

SE

IBOP TDS

LINK TDS

OPE N

ELE

VAT OR

CLO

SE

RAC KER X OVE /Y RRID E

OFF /AUT O

PAR KIN

G BR

RAC K TRA ER OVE VEL RRID E

ON

RAC KE JAW R S

AKE A OVE DS RRID E

RAC KER X OVE /Y RRID E

When the button is released, the tool returns to normal operating mode.

21-12 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 21-13 of 14

21

Racker (Pipe Racking System PRS)

Racker Travel Override

Use extreme caution when overrides are engaged. The tool ignores safety interlocks, allowing it to enter a zone already occupied, and could easily collide with another tool. Significant risk of equipment damage and danger to personnel exists when the override is engaged. Failure to observe and follow proper safe working procedures could result in serious or fatal injury to personnel, significant equipment damage, and extended rig down time.

Press and hold the Racker Travel Override button (normally located on the operator workstation’s left control panel) to override the racker travel interlocks.

OFF /AUT O

ON OPE

N

CLO

SE

TDS B

OPE

N

TDS

RAK

E TDS FLO AT

CLO SE

DRIL

POW

ER S

L

TILT

OPE

N

LIPS

CLO

SE

IBOP TDS

LINK

TDS OPE N

ELE

VAT OR

CLO

SE

RAC KER X OVE /Y RRID E

OFF /AUT O

PAR K

ING

BR A

RAC K TRA ER OVE VEL RRID E

ON

RAC KE JAW R S

KE A OVE DS RRID E

RAC K TRA ER OVE VEL RRID E

When the button is released, the tool returns to normal operating mode.

21-13 www.nov.com

21

Racker (Pipe Racking System PRS)

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 21-14 of 14

21-14 www.nov.com

FINAL DOCUMENTATION Amphion Operator’s Guide

Section 1.22 Rotary Table

www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 22-1 of 8

Rotary Table

This chapter contains examples of Amphion operator interface screens and controls, and may or may not represent your particular rig configuration.

Operator Screen Press Tools --> Rotary Table to display the Rotary Table operator screen.

Tool Ownership Assume ownership of the rotary table to enable controls. See section titled "Tool Ownership" on page 2-34.

22-1 www.nov.com

22

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 22-2 of 8

Rotary Table

Status Displays The left side of the operator screen contains realtime speed and torque graphs that reflect their current values. Black markers indicate user-defined setpoint values. Additional status and alarm information displays to the right of the graphs. (See general descriptions below.) Also see section titled "Speed and Torque Controls" on page 22-4.

Hyd Press Alarm

Green indicates that hydraulic pressure is normal; red indicates it has exceeded or failed to reach an acceptable level.

Grease Tank Full

Red indicates that the grease level exceeds acceptable levels.

Low Grease Alarm

Red indicates that the grease level has fallen below an acceptable level.

RST Locked

Green indicates that the rotary support table is locked. See section titled "Lock Controls" on page 22-3.

Maint Mode

Yellow indicates that maintenance mode is active. See section titled "Maintenance Mode" on page 2-11.

22-2 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 22-3 of 8

Rotary Table

22

Direction Controls Press CCW (counter-clockwise) or CW (clockwise) to define the rotary table direction.

A green backlight indicates the current selection.

Lock Controls Press Unlock or Lock to release or lock the rotary table.

A green backlight indicates the current selection.

! Although engaging the lock prevents the RST from turning, it may move slightly until the lock is secure.

22-3 www.nov.com

22

Rotary Table

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 22-4 of 8

Speed and Torque Controls Defining the Speed Setpoint Press the Speed setpoint button to display the keypad.

Define the maximum speed value, then press Set to confirm the value and close the keypad. Use the blue arrow up or down buttons to incrementally adjust the value as needed.

Zero Throttle Press Zero Throttle to slowly reduce the speed of the rotary table to zero rpm.

Defining the Torque Setpoint Press Torque Setpoint to display its keypad pop-up window.

Define the maximum torque setpoint value, then press Set to confirm the value and close the keypad. Use the blue arrow up or down keys to incrementally adjust the value as needed.

22-4 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 22-5 of 8

Rotary Table

22

Rotary Table Menu Press the Rotary Table tool menu button to display its tool menu.

See section titled "Utility Menu" on page 2-13.

See section titled "Common Diagnostics Menu" on page 2-19.

See Chapter 3, titled "Alarms and Events.”

See section titled "Maintenance Mode" on page 2-11.

See section titled "Calibration" on page 22-6.

See section titled "Operator Screen" on page 22-1.

22-5 www.nov.com

22

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 22-6 of 8

Rotary Table

Calibration

Ensure that the tool is turned on, maintenance mode is active, both directions are unlocked, and the linear lock is engaged.

Press Rotary Table --> Calibration to display the Rotary Table Calibration screen.

1. Press Begin Calibration to display the second calibration screen.

! Ensure that the power slips are powered off, and remain so during this procedure, and that the load cell and lever arm can withstand 45,000 ft.-lbs. of pressure.

22-6 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 22-7 of 8

Rotary Table

22

2. Verify that the rotary table rotates freely in both directions. 3. Insert the torque calibration bowl, then connect the end of the torque arm to a Sampson post using a calibrated load cell. 4. Rotate the rotary table until it takes up the line slack.

The rotary table must be stalled while pulling against the load cell, with a speed setpoint of approximately 2 rpm, and a torque setpoint of approximately 20,000 ft.-lbs.

5. Press the Torque Arm Length - Change or Number of Points - Change button if necessary to display their keypad.

22-7 www.nov.com

22

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 22-8 of 8

Rotary Table

6. Define the correct value, then press Set to confirm the value and close the keypad. 7. Press Next Step, then follow the remaining screen prompts to complete the calibration process for the clockwise (CW) direction.

! This calibration procedure must be performed in each direction (clockwise and counter-clockwise).

8. Once the CW calibration is complete, rig the load cell for counter-clockwise (CCW) calibration. 9. Follow the same procedure to calibrate the CCW direction using the second calibration screen (shown on page 22-7).

The tool controller automatically determines which calibration data to update, based upon the operation’s direction.

22-8 www.nov.com

FINAL DOCUMENTATION Amphion Operator’s Guide

Section 1.23 Roughneck

www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 23-1 of 28

Roughneck

This chapter contains examples of Amphion operator interface screens and controls, and may or may not represent your particular rig configuration.

Operator Screen Press Tools --> Roughneck to display the Automated Roughneck operator screen.

Tool Ownership Assume ownership of the roughneck to enable controls. See section titled "Tool Ownership" on page 2-34.

23-1 www.nov.com

23

Roughneck

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 23-2 of 28

Status Displays and Readings The top portion of the screen contains status displays and current settings.

Tool On

Displays green when the current workstation has control (ownership) of the tool.

E-Stop

Displays red when the emergency stop is engaged; black indicates an idle state.

Hydraulic Pressure Low

Displays red when hydraulic pressure falls below an acceptable level; black indicates a normal state.

Torque Gauge and Setpoint

The torque gauge located in the top left corner of the screen displays the current torque reading. A blue marker on the gauge and a digital reading located directly below the gauge indicate the user-defined torque setpoint value. You can change the torque setpoint value incrementally by pressing the blue arrow up or down buttons. See section titled "Defining a Torque Setpoint Value" on page 23-12.

Tool Joint Length

Displays the current user-defined tool joint length value. See section titled "Defining the Tool Joint Length" on page 23-13 for information about changing the value.

Maintenance Mode

Displays green when maintenance mode is engaged; black when it is not. See section titled "Maintenance Mode" on page 2-11.

Tool Interlock

Displays red when a tool interlock is preventing further movement of the tool; black indicates a normal state. See Chapter 3, titled "Alarms and Events.”

ZMS Interlock

Displays red when a zone management system interlock is preventing further movement of the tool; black indicates a normal state. See Chapter 27, titled "Zone Management System (ZMS).”

Slow Mode

Displays green when slow mode is active. See section titled "Slow Mode Controls" on page 23-13.

Power Slips Mode

Displays green when power slips mode is active. See section titled "Power Slip Mode Controls" on page 23-14.

Tool Mode

Displays the currently-selected tool mode. See section titled "Roughneck Modes" on page 23-14.

Well/Foxhole Selection

Displays the currently selected/user-defined roughneck path. See section titled "Positions Setup" on page 23-19, and section titled "Configuring the Roughneck" on page 23-12.

Operator messages display along the bottom of the screen.

23-2 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 23-3 of 28

Roughneck

23

Joystick Touchscreen Controls Press the Joystick button to display the roughneck’s virtual Joystick screen.

Press the SW Carriage - Up or Down buttons to control the spin wrench carriage as needed. The red circle represents the current position of the virtual joystick. Touch and drag horizontally along the grid to travel the roughneck forward or reverse (toward the well center or toward a park position). Touch and drag vertically to hoist or lower the main carriage. Use the blue arrow down or arrow up buttons to incrementally adjust the roughneck’s joystick scale multiplier value. This value determines the virtual joystick’s sensitivity. See section titled "Travel Controls" on page 23-4, and section titled "Torque Wrench Carriage Controls" on page 23-10. Press Save to store the joystick settings. Press Help to display the Joystick Help screen.

Press Close to close the Joystick Help screen. Press Close again to return to the Roughneck operator screen.

23-3 www.nov.com

23

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 23-4 of 28

Roughneck

Travel Controls Depending on your roughneck model and your rig configuration, you may be able to define the travel direction by using the AR Travel - Well or Back discrete switch, normally located on the operator workstation’s right control panel.

BREA

OUT

K

E MAK

IN

N DOW UP

RQUE

AR TO IN AR SP

E

CLOS

GE RRIA

TW CA

E

CLOS

B

L

ACK

WEL

WEL

L

BACK

OPEN

OPEN

AR TW AR SW AR TR

EL

AV R TR

A

AVEL

TOOL P RSHI OWNE E ALL AS RELE S SLIP LE P/ ENAB EVATOR BX EL

Also see section titled "Joystick Touchscreen Controls" on page 23-3.

Trip Mode Controls Press the Trip Mode toggle button to select between Trip In and Trip Out operational modes.

A green backlight indicates the current selection.

23-4 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 23-5 of 28

Roughneck

23

Auto Sequence Controls Press the Auto Sequence button to begin the automatic sequence.

A green backlight indicates that automatic sequence is on. Depending on your roughneck model and your rig configuration, you may also be able to begin auto sequence by pushing the AR - Auto Sequence button, normally located on the operator workstation’s right control panel.

OOR L FL DRIL IPMENT EQU TOP E-S

PUS

H TO

P STO

M

TDS

P RT R

O AUT AR - ENCE U SEQ

O AUT AR - ENCE U SEQ

See the product-specific “Automated Roughneck Service Manual” for more information about automatic sequence mode.

23-5 www.nov.com

23

Roughneck

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 23-6 of 28

Override Controls

Use operator override mode with caution. The tool ignores safety interlocks, allowing it to enter a zone already occupied, and could easily collide with another tool. Significant risk of equipment damage and danger to personnel exists when the override is engaged. Failure to observe and follow proper safe working procedures could result in serious or fatal injury to personnel, significant equipment damage, and extended rig down time.

Press and hold the Override button to enable the roughneck override.

Override mode reduces the roughneck’s operation speed to 50% of its maximum, and allows it to travel beyond its normal limits. See Chapter 27, titled "Zone Management System (ZMS)” for more information about tool overrides.

23-6 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 23-7 of 28

Roughneck

23

Spin Wrench Controls Press the Spin Wrench - Extend or Retract button to extend or retract the spin wrench. Press the Spin Wrench - Open or Close button to open or close the spin wrench clamp.

A green backlight indicates the current selection. Depending on your roughneck model and your rig configuration, you may also be able to control the spin wrench clamp by using the AR SW - Open or Close discrete switch, normally located on the operator workstation’s right control panel.

K

MAK

E

BREA

OUT IN

N DOW UP

RQUE

AR TO AR SP TW

IN E CLOS

IAGE CARR E

CLOS

CLO

SE

L WEL

BACK

OPEN

OPEN

AR TW

N

OPE

AR SW AR TR

AVEL

TOOL P RSHI OWNE E ALL AS RELE

W

AR S

S SLIP LE P/ ENAB EVATOR BX EL

23-7 www.nov.com

23

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 23-8 of 28

Roughneck

Spin Mode Controls Press the Out or In buttons to define the direction of the spin wrench.

A green backlight indicates the current selection. Depending on your roughneck model and your rig configuration, you may also be able to control the spin mode by using the AR Spin - In or Out discrete switch, normally located on the operator workstation’s right control panel.

BREA

OUT

OUT

K

MAK

E

IN

N DOW UP

RQUE

AR TO

IN AR SP TW CA

IN E CLOS

GE RRIA E

CLOS

L WEL

BACK

OPEN

OPEN

AR TW

PIN

AR S

AR SW AR

EL TRAV

TOOL P RSHI OWNE E ALL AS RELE S SLIP LE P/ ENAB EVATOR BX EL

23-8 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 23-9 of 28

Roughneck

23

Torque Wrench Tong Controls Press the Torque Wrench - Open or Close buttons to open or close the torque wrench tong.

A green backlight indicates the current selection. Depending on your roughneck model and your rig configuration, you may also be able to control the torque wrench tong by using the AR TW - Open or Close discrete switch, normally located on the operator workstation’s right control panel.

K

OUT

MAK

E

BREA

IN N DOW UP RQUE

AR TO AR SP TW

IN E CLOS

IAGE CARR E

CLOS

SE CLO

L WEL

BACK

OPEN

OPEN

AR TW

N OPE

AR SW AVEL AR TR

TOOL P RSHI OWNE E ALL AS RELE

W AR T

S SLIP LE P/ ENAB EVATOR BX EL

23-9 www.nov.com

23

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 23-10 of 28

Roughneck

Torque Wrench Carriage Controls Depending on your roughneck model and your rig configuration, you may be able to control the TW Carriage - Up or Down discrete switch, normally located on the operator workstation’s right control panel.

BREA

OUT

N DOW

K

E MAK

IN

N DOW UP

UP

RQUE

AR TO IN AR SP

CLOS

GE RRIA

TW CA

WEL

L

E CLOS BACK

AR TW

GE RRIA

AR SW

A

TW C

E

OPEN

OPEN

AR TR

AVEL

TOOL P RSHI OWNE E ALL AS RELE S SLIP LE P/ ENAB EVATOR BX EL

23-10 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 23-11 of 28

23

Roughneck

Torque Mode Controls Press the Torque - Break or Make buttons to define the direction of the torque wrench.

A green backlight indicates the current selection. Depending on your roughneck model and your rig configuration, you may also be able to control the torque mode using the AR Torque - Break or Make discrete switch, normally located on the operator workstation’s right control panel.

K

OUT

E MAK AK

MAK

E

BREA

IN

N DOW UP

BRE

RQUE

AR TO AR SP TW CA

IN E CLOS

GE RRIA E

CLOS

L WEL

BACK

AR TW

E

AR

OPEN

OPEN

QU TOR

AR SW AR TR

AVEL

TOOL P RSHI OWNE E ALL AS RELE S SLIP LE P/ ENAB EVATOR BX EL

23-11 www.nov.com

23

Roughneck

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 23-12 of 28

Configuring the Roughneck From the Roughneck operator screen, press Configure (located in the lower right corner of the screen) to display the Roughneck Configuration screen.

Defining a Torque Setpoint Value Press the Torque button to display its keypad.

23-12 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 23-13 of 28

Roughneck

23

Define a new value, then press Set to confirm and close the keypad. Use the blue arrow up and down buttons to incrementally adjust the value.

Defining the Tool Joint Length Press the Tool Joint Length button to display its keypad.

Define a new value, then press Set to confirm and close the keypad. Use the blue arrow up or down buttons to incrementally adjust the value.

Slow Mode Controls Press the Slow Mode button to limit the travel speed of the roughneck to 50% of its maximum. Slow mode also limits the spinning wrench and carriage speed.

A green backlight indicates that the mode is enabled. Press the Slow Mode button again to disable slow mode.

23-13 www.nov.com

23

Roughneck

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 23-14 of 28

Power Slip Mode Controls Press the Power Slips Mode button to define the position of the slips to avoid collision with the carriage (On = In place, Off = Not in place).

A green backlight indicates that mode is enabled. Press the Slips Mode button again to disable power slips mode.

Roughneck Modes Press to select a mode (see general descriptions below).

23-14 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 23-15 of 28

Roughneck

R

Normal: Select this mode during normal operations.

R

SW Backup: Select this mode to use the torque wrench as the spinning wrench backup. This mode is normally used at the foxhole, or when manual slips are used.

R

TDS Backup: Select this mode to designate the torque wrench as the top drive backup.

R

Bit Break: Select this mode to use the bit break wrench instead of the torque wrench.

R

Mud Bucket: Use Mud Bucket Mode to communicate whether or not the mud buckets are present (On = present, Off = not present).

23

The currently-selected tool mode displays along the top of the screen, and also displays on the main operator screen.

Well/Foxhole Selection Press to select a well and foxhole option.

See section titled "Positions Setup" on page 23-19. Press Close to return to the Roughneck operator screen.

23-15 www.nov.com

23

Roughneck

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 23-16 of 28

Roughneck Status Press the Status button to display the Roughneck Position Status screen.

Green displays indicate an active state or mode for the clamps, torque wrench, spin wrench clamp, and spin wrench direction. Digital readings display the current position of the roughneck (traverse), main carriage, spin wrench carriage, torque, and clamp. Press Close to return to the Roughneck operator screen.

23-16 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 23-17 of 28

Roughneck

23

Roughneck Tool Menu Press the Roughneck button to display its tool menu.

See section titled "Utility Menu" on page 2-13.

See section titled "Common Diagnostics Menu" on page 2-19.

See Chapter 3, titled "Alarms and Events.”

See section titled "Maintenance Mode" on page 2-11.

See section titled "Positions Setup" on page 23-19.

See section titled "Calibration" on page 23-18.

See section titled "Operator Screen" on page 23-1.

23-17 www.nov.com

23

Roughneck

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 23-18 of 28

Calibration

Ensure that the roughneck is turned on, and maintenance mode is enabled.

Press Roughneck --> Calibration to display the default Roughneck Calibration screen.

Press to select an axis, then follow screen prompts to calibrate the roughneck.

Casing Module calibration buttons are enabled only if the roughneck is equipped with a casing module.

23-18 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 23-19 of 28

23

Roughneck

Positions Setup

! Calibrate the roughneck prior to performing positions setup.

Press Roughneck --> Setup to display the Roughneck Positions Setup screen.

Press to select a position from the left side of the screen (see initial screens for each position on the following pages), then follow screen prompts to complete each position setup.

Perform the minimum and maximum travel position setup before proceeding with remaining travel parameters. Activate maintenance mode if necessary. See section titled "Maintenance Mode" on page 2-11.

23-19 www.nov.com

23

Roughneck

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 23-20 of 28

Travel Minimum and Maximum Position

Well Center and Foxhole Setup

Press to select a well center and foxhole combination.

23-20 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 23-21 of 28

23

Roughneck

All Well Center and Foxhole setup screens offer the option to change the assigned names. Press Change Name to display the alpha-numeric keypad.

Define the name, then press Enter to close the keypad and return to the previous screen.

Well Center Only

Foxhole

23-21 www.nov.com

23

Roughneck

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 23-22 of 28

Well Center and Foxhole

Well Center and Two Foxholes

23-22 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 23-23 of 28

Roughneck

23

Well Center and Foxhole With Turn Table

Well Center and Two Foxholes With Turn Table

23-23 www.nov.com

23

Roughneck

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 23-24 of 28

Travel Home Position

Travel Duck Position

23-24 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 23-25 of 28

Roughneck

23

Duck Height

Mud Bucket

23-25 www.nov.com

23

Roughneck

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 23-26 of 28

Bit Breaker

Rotating Tong Open Throat

23-26 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 23-27 of 28

Roughneck

23

Travel Well/Foxhole Offset

23-27 www.nov.com

23

Roughneck

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 23-28 of 28

23-28 www.nov.com

FINAL DOCUMENTATION Amphion Operator’s Guide

Section 1.24 S-DAQ™

www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-0001 Revision 01 Page 24-1 of 8

S-DAQ™

This chapter contains examples of Amphion operator interface screens and controls, and may or may not represent your particular rig configuration.

Operator Screen Press Tools --> S-DAQ to display the S-DAQ operator screen.

Hook Load and Weight On Bit The analog gauge contains a digital and graphical display of the current hook load. The red needle moves along the outer edge of the gauge to point to the current weight. The bar graph located to the right of the gauge provides a current weight on bit (WOB) reading, as well as a digital reading located at the bottom of the graph. Press Zero Weight on Bit to zero the reading.

24-1 www.nov.com

24

D811001248-MAN-0001 Revision 01 Page 24-2 of 8

S-DAQ™

Standpipe Pressure The analog gauge contains a digital and graphical display of the current standpipe pressure (SPP) reading. The red needle moves along the outer edge of the gauge to point to the current pressure.

RPM, Torque, and Tong Line Displays Top drive and rotary table speed and torque readings display beneath the hook load gauge. A tong line pull weight graph and digital reading displays to the right of the RPM and torque readings. A blue bar rises and falls to mark the current reading.

Mud Pump Displays and Controls The individual average strokes per minute (SPM) readings display graphically and digitally. Digital readings located directly beneath the graphs display the average stroke count value for enabled pumps.

Average Stroke Count

24-2 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-0001 Revision 01 Page 24-3 of 8

S-DAQ™

24

Cumulative stroke counts display along the bottom of the screen (beneath the average SPM graphs) for all enabled pumps combined and individually.

Cumulative Stroke Count

Press Zero to restart the cumulative or individual stroke count.

Alarm Displays Depending on your rig configuration, you may be able to set up alarms for many gauges, graphs, or readings displayed on the S-DAQ screens.

The background of the digital readings or graph display red if the preset value reaches the highhigh range or the low-low range. The background displays yellow if the preset value reaches the high or low range.

Digital Readings R

A small red rectangle in the bottom right corner of the display indicates that an alarm trigger for a high-high value has been set.

R

A small yellow rectangle in the bottom right corner of the display indicates that an alarm trigger for a high value has been set.

R

A small yellow rectangle in the bottom left of corner of the display indicates that an alarm trigger for a low value has been set.

R

A small red rectangle in the bottom left corner indicates that an alarm trigger for a low-low value has been set.

Graphs R

Red markers along the top side of the graphs indicate the preset high-high range alarm, and where the high-high alarm will be triggered.

24-3 www.nov.com

24

S-DAQ™

D811001248-MAN-0001 Revision 01 Page 24-4 of 8

R

Yellow markers along the top side of the graphs indicate the preset high range alarm, and where the high alarm will be triggered.

R

Yellow markers along the bottom side of the graphs indicates the preset low range alarm, and where the low alarm will be triggered.

R

Red markers along the bottom side of the graphs indicate the preset low-low range alarm, and where the low-low alarm will be triggered.

See section titled "Alarm Setup" on page 3-6 for more information.

24-4 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-0001 Revision 01 Page 24-5 of 8

S-DAQ™

24

S-DAQ Menu Press the S-DAQ button to display its tool menu.

See section titled "Utility Menu" on page 2-13.

See section titled "Common Diagnostics Menu" on page 2-19.

See Chapter 3, titled "Alarms and Events.”

See section titled "Operator Screen" on page 24-1.

See section titled "Mud Pits" on page 24-6.

24-5 www.nov.com

24

S-DAQ™

D811001248-MAN-0001 Revision 01 Page 24-6 of 8

Mud Pits Shaker Tanks Press S-DAQ --> Mud Pits to display the default Shaker Tanks screen.

Status Displays and Tank Controls Vertical graphs and digital readings reflect current shaker tank, trip tank, gain/loss, and active total volume deviation (ATVD) levels. A graph and digital reading on the right side of the screen displays the total volume for all tanks combined. Blue bars rise and fall to mark the current readings. Press any tank’s Activate button to activate that tank. Press the Gain/Loss or ATVD’s Reset button to reset the value.

24-6 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-0001 Revision 01 Page 24-7 of 8

24

S-DAQ™

Alarm Displays Depending on your rig configuration, you may be able to set up alarms for many gauges, graphs, or readings displayed on the S-DAQ screens. See section titled "Mud Pump Displays and Controls" on page 24-2.

Also see section titled "Alarm Setup" on page 3-6 for more information.

Suction Tanks At the Shaker Tanks screen, press Suction A - D to display the Mud Pit - Suction Tanks screen.

Status Displays and Tank Controls Vertical graphs and digital readings reflect current suction tank, trip tank, return flow, gain/loss, and active total volume deviation (ATVD) levels. A graph and digital reading on the right side of the screen displays the total volume for all tanks combined.

24-7 www.nov.com

24

S-DAQ™

D811001248-MAN-0001 Revision 01 Page 24-8 of 8

Blue bars rise and fall to mark the current readings. Press any tank’s Activate button to activate that tank. Press the Gain/Loss or ATVD’s Reset button to reset the value. Press Shaker A-D to return to the Shaker Tanks screen.

Alarm Displays Depending on your rig configuration, you may be able to set up alarms for many gauges, graphs, or readings displayed on the S-DAQ screens. See section titled "Mud Pump Displays and Controls" on page 24-2.

Also see section titled "Alarm Setup" on page 3-6 for more information.

24-8 www.nov.com

FINAL DOCUMENTATION Amphion Operator’s Guide

Section 1.25 Top Drive System (TDS)

www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 25-1 of 20

Top Drive System (TDS)

This chapter contains examples of Amphion operator interface screens and controls, and may or may not represent your particular rig configuration.

Operator Screen Press Tools --> Top Drive to display the Top Drive operator screen.

Tool Ownership Assume ownership of the top drive to enable controls. See section titled "Tool Ownership" on page 2-34.

25-1 www.nov.com

25

Top Drive System (TDS)

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 25-2 of 20

Status Readings and Alarms Speed and Torque Displays Vertical Speed (throttle) and Torque graphs display along the left side of the Top Drive operator screen.

Digital readings are represented by blue or green bars that rise and fall to indicate the current values. Black markers indicate the current user-defined setpoint values.

See section titled "Speed and Torque Controls" on page 25-4 for information about defining various setpoint values.

Current throttle (speed), drill torque, makeup torque, spin speed, and spin torque values display along the top of the screen.

25-2 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 25-3 of 20

Top Drive System (TDS)

25

Status Indicators Current status indicators display along the right side of the Top Drive operator screen.

R

Dolly (Extended/Retracted): A text box indicates whether the dolly is extended or retracted. See section titled "Dolly Controls" on page 25-12.

R

IBOP Closed: Yellow indicates that the internal blowout preventer (IBOP) is closed. See section titled "Elevator, Torque Wrench, and IBOP Controls" on page 25-9.

R

BX Elev Closed: Green indicates that the BX elevator is closed. See section titled "Elevator, Torque Wrench, and IBOP Controls" on page 25-9.

R

RLA Home: Green indicates that the rotating link adapter (RLA) is in the home position. See section titled "CCW and CW Link Rotation" on page 25-13.

R

Slips (Open/Closed): Green Slips Open indicates that the power slips are open and a green Slips Closed indicator means they are closed. See Chapter 18, titled "Power Slips.”

R

Brake On: Yellow indicates that the brake is engaged. See section titled "Brake Controls" on page 25-11.

R

Ramp Failed: Red indicates that the motor ramp-up failed. See section titled "Auxiliary Motors" on page 25-18.

R

Drive Fault: Red indicates a variable frequency drive (VFD) fault. See section titled "Motor/VFD Status" on page 25-16.

25-3 www.nov.com

25

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 25-4 of 20

Top Drive System (TDS)

R

Hydraulic Alarm: Red indicates hydraulic pressure has fallen below acceptable limits.

! If the top drive continues rotating with low hydraulic pressure, severe equipment damage may occur.

R

Lube Alarm: Red indicates that the gear box lubrication level has fallen below an acceptable level (alarm state). See section titled "Auxiliary Motors" on page 25-18.

R

Blower Alarm: Red indicates a blower fault. See section titled "Auxiliary Motors" on page 25-18.

R

Power Limit: Red indicates that the variable frequency drives (VFDs) and motors have reached a predefined power limit value. See Chapter 19, titled "Power System.”

Operator messages display along the bottom of the screen. Messages include operational status information (such as brief descriptions of interlock conditions that are preventing certain operations).

Speed and Torque Controls Defining a Throttle Limit Press Throttle to display the throttle setpoint keypad.

Define a maximum throttle value, then press Set to confirm close the keypad. Press the blue arrow up or down buttons located at the bottom of the graph to incrementally increase or decrease the Throttle setpoint value.

25-4 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 25-5 of 20

Top Drive System (TDS)

25

Zero Throttle Press Zero Throttle to remove throttle from the top drive and reduce its speed to zero.

Defining a Drill Torque Limit Press Drill Torque to display the drill torque keypad.

Define a drill torque limit, then press Set to confirm the value and close the keypad. Press the blue arrow up or down buttons located at the bottom of the drill torque graph to incrementally increase or decrease the Drill Torque value.

Defining a Makeup Torque Limit Press Makeup Torque to display the makeup torque keypad.

Define a makeup torque limit, then press Set to confirm the value and close the keypad.

25-5 www.nov.com

25

Top Drive System (TDS)

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 25-6 of 20

Defining a Spin Speed Limit

The top drive must be turned off before setting spin parameters.

Press Spin Speed to display the spin speed keypad.

Define a spin speed limit, then press Set to confirm the value and close the keypad.

25-6 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 25-7 of 20

Top Drive System (TDS)

25

Defining a Spin Torque Limit

The top drive must be turned off before setting spin parameters.

Press Spin Torque to display the spin torque keypad.

Define a spin torque limit, then press Set to confirm the value and close the keypad.

Direction and Mode Controls Top drive Direction and Mode controls display near the top center portion of the operator screen. These controls remain on the operator screen during all other selected operations.

Press Reverse, Off (disable), or Forward to define the top drive’s spin direction. A green backlight marks the current selection. Press Drill, Spin, or Torque to select a top drive mode: R

Select Drill mode to run the top drive at the speed and Drill Torque setpoints. See section titled "Speed and Torque Controls" on page 25-4.

R

Select Spin mode to run the top drive at the user-defined spin speed and spin torque. See section titled "Speed and Torque Controls" on page 25-4.

25-7 www.nov.com

25

Top Drive System (TDS)

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 25-8 of 20

R

Press and hold the Torque button to run the top drive using the user-defined Make Up Torque setpoint. Release the button to return to Spin mode. See section titled "Speed and Torque Controls" on page 25-4.

R

Press and hold the Torque button to execute a make up or break out sequence. The selected direction determines if it is a make up or a break out sequence.

Make Up Sequence R

With the Top Drive direction set to Forward - When the Torque button is pressed the Top Drive will verify that the connection is shouldered by first executing a spin in sequence. When the feedback torque is at or greater than the spin torque setting the torque limit is then ramped up to the make up torque setting. Once the torque feedback is equal to or greater than the make up torque setting the connection is complete and the operator can release the Torque button. At this point the torque limit will then be ramped down.

If the Torque Wrench is in auto, the first action in the sequence will be to set the RLA lock and close the Torque Wrench clamp. The last action in the sequence is to release the clamp.

Break Out Sequence R

With the Top Drive direction set to Reverse - When the Torque button is pressed the Top Drive will begin to ramp the torque limit to the maximum torque setting. When the connection breaks and the torque feedback is less than the spin torque setting the Top Drive will then go into the spin out phase and stay there until the operator releases the Torque button.

If the operator selects Torque while in Drill mode the Torque Wrench will always be used whether or not the Top Drive is in Auto mode. If the connection needs to be broken out without using the Torque Wrench the operator must select Torque Mode while in Spin mode.

A green backlight marks the current selection.

25-8 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 25-9 of 20

Top Drive System (TDS)

25

Elevator, Torque Wrench, and IBOP Controls Press Elev/TW/IBOP to display the top drive’s elevator, torque wrench, and internal blowout preventer (IBOP) controls.

Elevator and Elevator Rotation R

Press the Elevator Rotation - Down or Up button to define the elevator rotation.

R

Press the Elevator - Open button to open the elevator.

R

Press the Elevator - Arm button to arm the pipe trigger, located at the back of the elevator. The elevator closes when the pipe presses the trigger.

A green backlight marks the current selection. You can also control the elevator using the TDS Elevator - Open or Close discrete switch located on operator workstation’s left control panel.

DRIL L

TDS

LINK

OPE

N

TILT

FLO AT TDS

CLO SE

LINK

OPE

N CLO

SE

OPE N

TDS ELEV ATO R RACK

CLO SE

ER JA W

OFF /AUT O

CLO SE

DRAW

OVERWORKS RIDE

PARK IN

G BR

AKE

DOLL Y EN

TDS

ELE

VAT OR

ABLE SLIP

S EN

OPE N

ABLE

CLO SE

IBOP

Torque Wrench R

Press and hold the Torque Wrench - Clamp button to manually clamp the torque wrench onto the drill pipe. A blue outline surrounds the button when active.

25-9 www.nov.com

25

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 25-10 of 20

Top Drive System (TDS)

R

Press the Torque Wrench - Auto toggle button to use automatic torque wrench mode during makeup operations.

A green backlight marks the current selection.

IBOP Press the IBOP - Open or Close button to open or close the internal blowout preventer (IBOP). A green backlight marks the current selection.

You can also control the IBOP using the IBOP - Open or Close discrete switch located on the operator workstation’s left control panel.

DRIL

L

TDS

LINK

FLO AT

OPE

N

TILT

TDS

CLO

SE

LINK

OPE N CLO

SE

TDS ELE VATO R RAC

KER

OFF /AUTO

JAW

CLO S

E

DRAW

OVE WORKS RRID E

PAR KIN

G BR

AKE

DOLL Y EN

OPE N

ABLE SLIP

OPE N

S EN

ABLE

CLO SE

CLO SE

IBOP

IBOP

25-10 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 25-11 of 20

Top Drive System (TDS)

25

Brake Controls Press Brake to display the top drive’s brake controls.

If there s a VFD fault active, the brake is held in the applied state and cannot be released until the fault is cleared.

Press the Brake - Off, Auto, or On buttons to set the top drive brake mode: R

Select Brake - Off to disengage the brake.

R

Select Brake - Auto to automatically disengage the brake when the operator demands throttle, and automatically engage the brake when the operator returns the speed to zero throttle position. The brake will not engage until the drive stops, and is not holding torque.

R

Select Brake - On to engage the brake.

A green backlight marks the current selection.

25-11 www.nov.com

25

Top Drive System (TDS)

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 25-12 of 20

Dolly Controls Press Dolly to display the dolly controls.

R

Select Dolly - Auto to allow the dolly to automatically extend and retract.

R

Press and hold the Dolly - Manual button to manually control the dolly. The dolly will stop in mid tavel if button is released.

R

Press and hold the Dolly - Extend or Retract buttons as needed while in manual mode.

A green backlight marks the current selections. A blue bar on the vertical graph rises and falls, reflecting the current dolly position. The Fully Extended or Fully Retracted lights display green when the dolly is fully extended or retracted.

25-12 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 25-13 of 20

25

Top Drive System (TDS)

Link Controls Press Links to display the top drive’s link controls.

CCW and CW Link Rotation Use Link Rotation controls to rotate both the torque wrench and the link tilt assemblies. R

Press and hold the CCW (counter-clockwise) or CW (clockwise) - Jog button to rotate the link adapter in the selected direction.

R

Press the CCW or CW - Home button to move the rotating link adapter to the next preset home position in the selected direction.

The RLA Home status indicator displays green when the rotating link adapter (RLA) is in the home position. See section titled "Status Indicators" on page 25-3. The Link Tilt must be in Float to enable RLA or Link Tilt rotation (see section titled "Link Tilt” below). A green backlight marks the current selection.

Link Tilt Press the Link Tilt - Drill, Float, or Tilt buttons to control the elevator links: R

Select Drill to tilt the elevator links backward into a position that allows drilling operations to proceed.

R

Select Float to allow the elevator links to float into a neutral position.

R

Select Tilt to tilt the elevator links forward to the preset derrickman and mousehole positions. Press once to tilt forward to the preset derrickman position. After unlocking the link tilt assembly mousehole position (see below), press this button again to tilt forward to the mousehole.

A green backlight indicates the current selection.

Mousehole Press the Mousehole - Unlock button to allow the links to tilt forward to the preset mousehole position. After unlocking, press the Link Tilt - Tilt button to tilt forward to the mousehole.

25-13 www.nov.com

25

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 25-14 of 20

Top Drive System (TDS)

Top Drive Tool Menu Press the Top Drive main menu button to display its tool menu.

See section titled "Utility Menu" on page 2-13.

See section titled "Common Diagnostics Menu" on page 2-19.

See Chapter 3, titled "Alarms and Events.”

See section titled "Data Trends" on page 25-19.

See section titled "Auxiliary Motors" on page 25-18.

See section titled "Motor/VFD Status" on page 25-16.

See Chapter 4, titled "Assignments.”

See section titled "Operator Screen" on page 25-1.

25-14 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 25-15 of 20

25

Top Drive System (TDS)

Assignments Press Top Drive --> Assignments to display the Drawworks/Top Drive Assignments screen.

This screen provides a way for the operator to assign VFD motors to the drawworks and the top drive. It also displays the current status of all VFDs. See Chapter 4, titled "Assignments” for more information.

This may not always apply to all rigs.

25-15 www.nov.com

25

Top Drive System (TDS)

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 25-16 of 20

Motor/VFD Status Press Top Drive --> Status to display the Motor/VFD Status screen.

This screen displays the chopper module drawworks brake resistor (DBR) status, as well as the status of the top drive motor and assigned VFD.

Chopper/DBR Status Displays R

On Line Capacity: Displays the kilowatt (kW) capacity (continuous current) for the parallel chopper modules.

R

Health: Displays green to indicate that the chopper is online and operating normally; red to indicate a fault or alarm state; black to indicate that the chopper is offline.

R

DBR Air Flow: Displays green to indicate that the drawworks brake resistor air flow fan is on and operating normally; black to indicate it is off.

TDS Motor/Assigned VFD Status Displays R

Speed Command: Displays the current speed command value received by the motor.

R

Speed Feedback: Displays the actual speed of the motor.

R

Torque Limit: Displays the user-defined torque limit value. See section titled "Speed and Torque Controls" on page 25-4.

R

Torque Feedback: Displays the actual torque on the motor.

R

Status: Displays the status of the assigned VFD motor; see section titled "Status Displays" on page 25-18.

25-16 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 25-17 of 20

Top Drive System (TDS)

25

Motor Winding and Temperature The motor temperature status is displayed on the Motor/VFD Status screen.

Motor Winding Temp Displays the temperature returned from the resistance temperature detector (RTD) for each winding on the three-phase motor.

Motor Temp Abort Press and hold the Motor Temp Abort - Override button to temporarily override a motor temperature alarm state and continue operations.

Fault Reset The Fault Reset button is located in the top right corner of the Motor/VFD Status screen.

Press the Fault Reset button to clear fault displays after the condition is corrected.

! Resetting the faults does not clear active faults or alarms.

25-17 www.nov.com

25

Top Drive System (TDS)

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 25-18 of 20

Auxiliary Motors Press Top Drive --> Auxiliary Motors to display the Auxiliary Motors screen.

This screen displays the status for the lube and blower motors. You can also assume manual control of lube and blower motors using this screen.

Status Displays R

Motor Running: Green indicates that the motor is running.

R

Oil Temp: Red indicates that the motor’s oil temperature has exceeded acceptable limits.

R

Oil Pressure: Red indicates that pressure has exceeded or fallen below acceptable limits.

R

Motor Overtemp: Red indicates that the motor temperature has exceeded acceptable limits.

R

Air Pressure: Red indicates that pressure has exceeded or fallen below acceptable limits.

Manual Controls Press the Manual Controls - Stop or Start button to manually control a lube or blower motor. A green or red backlight indicates the current selection.

25-18 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 25-19 of 20

Top Drive System (TDS)

25

Data Trends Press Top Drive --> Data Trends to display the Top Drive Data Trends screen.

The Data Trends screen displays the top drive’s drilling speed and torque values graphically: R

Press Speed (Day) to display drilling speed data for the past 24 hours.

R

Press Speed (Hour) to display drilling speed data for the past hour.

R

Press Torque (Day) to display torque speed data for the past 24 hours.

R

Torque (Hour) to display torque speed data for the past hour.

See section titled "Speed and Torque Controls" on page 25-4.

25-19 www.nov.com

25

Top Drive System (TDS)

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 25-20 of 20

25-20 www.nov.com

FINAL DOCUMENTATION Amphion Operator’s Guide

Section 1.26 V-DAQ™

www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 26-1 of 2

V-DAQ™

This chapter contains examples of Amphion operator interface screens and controls, and may or may not represent your particular rig configuration. See MD Totco document number 42TM62-20, titled “V-DAQ System V Data Acquisition User’s Manual” for more information.

Operator Screen Press Tools --> V-DAQ to display the V-DAQ operator screen.

26-1 www.nov.com

26

V-DAQ™

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 26-2 of 2

Navigation Press Screens located on the VDAQ operator screen to display the screen selection menu.

Press Amphion to return to the Amphion™ operator interface screen.

26-2 www.nov.com

FINAL DOCUMENTATION Amphion Operator’s Guide

Section 1.27 Zone Management System (ZMS)

www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 27-1 of 8

Zone Management System (ZMS)

This chapter contains general information about the National Oilwell Varco ZMS interface and controls, and may or may not represent your particular rig configuration. For more detailed information, see NOV document number SM01036, titled “3D Zone Management System Service Manual.”

Equipment Status Screen Press Tools --> Zone Management to display the default ZMS Equipment Status screen.

27-1 www.nov.com

27

Zone Management System (ZMS)

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 27-2 of 8

Status Displays R

A red Zone Management System Locked Out display (located in the top left corner of the screen) indicates that ZMS is shut off.

Use ZMS controls with extreme caution. The tool ignores ZMS interlocks when its override is engaged or locked out, allowing it to enter a zone already occupied or collide with another tool. Significant risk of equipment damage and danger to personnel exists when an override is engaged. Failure to follow safe work procedures could result in serious or fatal injury to personnel, significant equipment damage, and extended rig down time.

R

A red Lock Out display indicates that the tool has been locked out of the ZMS system. See section titled "Equipment Lockout" on page 27-6.

R

A red Override display indicates that the tool override is engaged. See section titled "Equipment Override" on page 27-4.

R

A red Interlock display indicates that further tool movement is prevented by a ZMS interlock.

Operator messages display beneath each tool display.

27-2 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 27-3 of 8

Zone Management System (ZMS)

27

Releasing Tool Ownership

For safety reasons, the operator that has ownership of the tool cannot also engage its override. This requires cooperation between the operator of the encroaching equipment, and the operator of the equipment being encroached upon, to actively consent and maintain the decision to enable movement.

Release ownership of the tools from either the tool screen, or push the button normally located on the operator workstation’s right control panel (see illustration below).

L TOO IP H ERS LL N W A O ASE E L E R

DEC

SE

INCR

EASE

L TOO IP H ERS OWN SE ALL A RELE SE/ CLO K LOC N/ OPE O T AU

REA

LOW LIC F RAU ALVE HYD V CMC UT OFF SH

AIR KING E WOR R CMC PRESSU APV

SE CLO N OPE

MAIN CMC E VALV

PULL PAY

EAD

CATH

See section titled "Tool Ownership" on page 2-34.

27-3 www.nov.com

27

Zone Management System (ZMS)

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 27-4 of 8

Equipment Override Press the Override button located at the top of the screen to display the ZMS Equipment Override screen. Return to this screen at any time by pressing Override.

A red Zone Management System Locked Out display (located in the top left corner of the screen) indicates that ZMS is shut off.

Use equipment override controls with extreme caution. The tool ignores ZMS interlocks when its override is engaged, allowing it to enter a zone already occupied or collide with another tool. Significant risk of equipment damage and danger to personnel exists when an override is engaged. Failure to follow safe work procedures could result in serious or fatal injury to personnel, significant equipment damage, and extended rig down time.

27-4 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 27-5 of 8

Zone Management System (ZMS)

27

Equipment overrides can be used to move equipment into zones where ZMS would normally prevent movement. Engage the override by releasing ownership of the tool, then pressing and holding its Override button on the ZMS Equipment Override screen.

For safety reasons, the operator that has ownership of the tool cannot also engage its override. This requires cooperation between the operator of the encroaching equipment, and the operator of the equipment being encroached upon, to actively consent and maintain the decision to enable movement.

27-5 www.nov.com

27

Zone Management System (ZMS)

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 27-6 of 8

Equipment Lockout Press the Lock Out button located at the top of the screen to display the ZMS Equipment Lockout screen.

A red Zone Management System Locked Out display (located in the top left corner of the screen) indicates that ZMS is shut off.

Locking out a tool using equipment lockout does not ensure that the tool will not move. Locked out tools can be moved if the tool is in maintenance mode, or if ZMS is locked out. Never use ZMS Lockout to disable a tool for maintenance purposes. Proper lockout/tag out procedures for electrical and hydraulic systems must be followed before performing tool maintenance. Significant risk of equipment damage and danger to personnel exists when an override is engaged. Failure to follow safe work procedures could result in serious or fatal injury to personnel, significant equipment damage, and extended rig down time.

27-6 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 27-7 of 8

Zone Management System (ZMS)

27

Use equipment lockouts (not ZMS lockout) to remove a tool from ZMS calculations (to perform maintenance, for example). Tools locked out cannot receive “enable” signals from ZMS, and therefore cannot be moved (except in maintenance mode). The tool becomes invisible to all other ZMS participants; other tools can enter zones occupied by locked out equipment and collide with them. Press the appropriate tool’s Lock Out toggle button to engage equipment lockout. Press again to disengage.

27-7 www.nov.com

27

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page 27-8 of 8

Zone Management System (ZMS)

ZMS Menu Press the ZMS button located on the main menu bar to display its tool menu.

See section titled "Utility Menu" on page 2-13.

See section titled "Common Diagnostics Menu" on page 2-19.

See Chapter 3, titled "Alarms and Events.”

See section titled "Equipment Status Screen" on page 27-1.

27-8 www.nov.com

FINAL DOCUMENTATION Amphion Operator’s Guide

Section 1.28 Appendix

www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page A-1 of 6

Appendix

This chapter contains general information about the Amphion control system, and may or may not represent your particular rig configuration.

Network Commands Opening a Command Prompt 1. Press to display the Windows® Start menu. 2. Click Run, then type cmd into the field provided.

Figure A-1. Command prompt

3. Press or click OK. 4. At the C:> prompt, type the appropriate network command , then press .

Command Descriptions and Syntax Ping Use the ping command with a url, IP address, or host name to test network connectivity, or to verify communication. Use the ping localhost command if both the host name and IP address are unknown (see Figure A-5 on page A-3). See section titled "Network Address Assignments" on page A-5 in this appendix for a complete IP address list.

A-1 www.nov.com

A

Appendix

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page A-2 of 6

Figure A-2. Ping using a url address

Figure A-3. Ping using the host name

Figure A-4. Ping using an IP address

A-2 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page A-3 of 6

Appendix

A

Figure A-5. Ping localhost

Ping Command Switch Options

Figure A-6. Ping command switch options

Use the ping command to display a list of command switches. Syntax example: ping

-t 123.45.67.8

IP Config Use the ipconfig command to determine the domain name server (DNS), IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway assigned to the current computer. Use the ipconfig /all command to list the IP address, subnet mask address, and other information for each network card to which the current computer is connected.

Tracert Use the tracert command and either the url or IP address to display hop information (all network devices between the your computer and the destination address). Syntax example: tracert

www.varco.com or tracert 123.45.67.8

A-3 www.nov.com

A

Appendix

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page A-4 of 6

Nslookup Use the nslookup command and a url address to troubleshoot name resolution issues. Displays server name and IP address information. Syntax example: nslookup

www.varco.com

Figure A-7. Nslookup command

A-4 www.nov.com

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page A-5 of 6

Appendix

A

Network Address Assignments

See NOV document number D801000721-GEN-001, titled “Amphion Standard DCDA Network IP Addresses,” or your rig-specific “Amphion Network Topology” document.

A-5 www.nov.com

A

Appendix

D811001248-MAN-001 Revision 01 Page A-6 of 6

A-6 www.nov.com